JP2017056349A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing inconvenience where players become bored with games.SOLUTION: Game balls are alternately distributed to a first flow channel and a second flow channel by first flow channel shifting means. The game ball distributed to the second flow channel by the first flow channel shifting means are alternately distributed to a third flow channel and a fourth flow channel for guiding the game balls to a ball entrance port by a second flow channel shifting means. On the basis of a game ball entrance to the ball entrance port, a winning/losing determination is performed by winning/losing determination means. When the determination is made as a winning by the winning/losing determination means, a privilege game is performed. Thereby, a player can enjoy a process till a game ball is distributed to the ball entrance port, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with games at an early stage. Also, after the privilege game, a flow channel is set with respect to at least either the first flow channel shifting means or the second flow channel shifting means, therefore the player can play games while wondering with pleasure to what flow channel a set is made.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Have been proposed to be implemented in.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, the probability that a game ball wins a prize at a start port provided on the game board surface is changed by adjusting a distance between nails provided on the game board surface.

JP 2003-305209 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, the process until the game ball wins the start opening is monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game when playing for a long time.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first flow path switching unit that alternately distributes game balls into a first flow path and a second flow path, and the first flow path switching unit. Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to a third flow path and a fourth flow path, and a fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means A game entrance that can enter a game ball flowing down, a game determination unit that determines whether or not the game is successful based on the game ball entering the game entrance, and a test result determination by the program determination unit. Based on the result being a win, at least one of the privilege game execution means for granting a privilege game to the player, and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the bonus game ends. For one side, determine the flow path to determine which flow path the game ball is assigned to And the step, and has a.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means include a first storage portion and a game ball that can receive a game ball. A second accommodating portion different from the first accommodating portion that can be received, the first accommodating portion and the second accommodating portion are provided, and the second accommodating portion rotates by receiving a game ball, The game balls are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first housing portion, and the game balls are placed in the first housing portion at the first position. A rotating means for rotating by receiving, distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path, and rotating the game balls to a second position where the game balls can be received by the second housing portion; In one position or the second position, the game ball is received in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation portion. Wherein said rotating means from the first position from the second position to the first position or the second position is one having a, a rotation restricting means for restricting that rotates.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the flow path determination means includes the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means based on a predetermined lottery. It is determined which of the first position and the second position is set, and the rotating means is located at the position determined by the flow path determining means and the first flow path switching means and the first position. It has autonomous rotating means for rotating the two flow path switching means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, corresponding to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means until a game ball enters the entrance. A setting table in which settings of the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are stored; and the flow path determination unit is configured to play a game at the entrance based on the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering a ball is determined, and based on the number of game balls, the first flow path switching means and the first The setting with the two flow path switching means is respectively determined.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means.

  Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early.

  In addition, after the bonus game is over, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly until the game balls enter the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. It can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that more enjoyment can be provided to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means.

  As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls can be alternately allocated more reliably.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, based on a predetermined lottery, the flow path determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means at the positions determined by the flow path determination means. Thereby, the setting after the privilege game of a 1st flow path switching means and a 2nd flow path switching means can be performed easily. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing at the end of the bonus game, and to shorten the time until the normal game is executed after the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means is made in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game ball into the entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game balls into the entrance is determined, and from the setting table, the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second channel switching unit is determined by the channel determining unit.

  Accordingly, the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member can be easily set in accordance with the number of game balls required to enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load after executing the privilege game can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state which won the game ball in the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number table per special symbol in 1st Embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special hit classification counter in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the pseudo fluctuation table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the background selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect of the special symbol displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is a pseudo | simulation in the ceiling variation pattern displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during fluctuation | variation of. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during the fluctuation | variation of pseudo | simulation symbols other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the ending alerting | reporting aspect for alert | reporting to a player that it was a jackpot with the short time displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) ) Is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying the player that it was a big hit without time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a background display mode of a precursor A displayed on the third symbol display device, and (d) schematically shows a background display mode of a precursor B displayed on the third symbol display device. (E) is the figure which showed typically the background display mode of precursor C displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the allocation apparatus error alerting | reporting control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution prize process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution discharge process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of distribution position initialization process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of distribution position initialization process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side in the state which the game ball won in the distribution device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the perspective view which expanded the variable winning device and the distribution winning device in jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 2nd Embodiment, a special symbol execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number table per special symbol in 2nd Embodiment. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per first normal symbol in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a random number table per second normal symbol in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the special hit classification table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the status selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the pseudo | simulation variation table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the background selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number setting table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the variation mode in case the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of the precursor A pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (B) schematically shows the variation mode when the variation of the special symbol is started while varying the precursor B pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the variation mode in case the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of the precursor C pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) shows a variation mode when an interrupt normal pseudo variation mode corresponding to a normal symbol is started while the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is varied. It is the figure shown typically, (b) is the normal normal corresponding to the hit of a normal symbol when the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the second embodiment is stopped It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case a pseudo | simulation variation aspect is started. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status determination process which is one process of the distribution prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance opening process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st distribution correction process which is one process of the normal entrance opening process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the random setting process which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is an illustration of an allocation prize device 64 provided on the game board 13. 4 is a perspective view of the inside from the front, FIG. 4 is a detailed view of the inside of the distribution prime 64 provided in the game board 13 as seen through from the front, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later is changed (for example, the color of the displayed character is variable). .

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a distribution winning device 64, The two-start winning device 300, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The distribution winning device 64, the second starting port 300, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A distribution winning device 64 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 64 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 64 is configured by a vertically long case body, and a ball entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the distribution winning device 64. The entrance 640 is composed of a gate type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed. Inside the distribution winning device 64, there is provided a first distribution rotation member 64a1 capable of distributing game balls to the left and right by rotating. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is pivotally supported by the case body constituting the distribution winning device 64 so as to be rotatable.

  The case body constituting the distribution winning device 64 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate PC or the like) whose inside can be seen through. The case body has a pattern printed with paint so that the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 provided therein are difficult to visually recognize (for example, a pattern of ripples with narrow intervals, characters such as numerals). Is drawn, and the movement of the game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the gap in the pattern.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to recognize the positions and states of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, and by visually observing the distribution winning device 64 from the outside of the gaming machine, It can be configured that it is difficult to determine how many balls will be awarded to the first start opening 71.

  The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the wall portion protrudes from the center of the semicircle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction to the front side of the gaming machine, and passes through the entrance 640. The first storage portion 64c1 and the second storage portion 64d1 that can receive the game balls. The first sorting rotation member 64a1 is a wall portion that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is formed vertically upward from the center of the semicircle with the semicircular arc directed upward. Where the first storage portion 64c1 is directed upward (in the direction of the entrance 640) and the second storage portion 64d1 is above the entrance (the entrance 640). The shaft is pivotally supported by about 90 degrees to the left and right. Specifically, when the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is rotated to the right and the first storage portion 64c1 is rotated to a position facing the upper side of the gaming machine, the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is further moved to the right. The rotation is prohibited by coming into contact with a stopper (not shown) that prohibits rotation in the direction. From the state in which the first housing portion 64c1 is directed upward, the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is rotated leftward so that the second housing portion 64d1 is located in the upward direction. The rotation of the member 64a1 is prohibited by coming into contact with a stopper portion (not shown) that prohibits the member 64a1 from rotating further to the left. In other words, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 uses the position where the first accommodating portion 64c1 is directed upward as a rotation region in the right direction, and the position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 is directed upward is rotated in the left direction. It is configured as an area.

  The first distribution rotating member 64a1 receives the game ball that has passed through the entrance 640 in the first accommodation portion 64c1 or the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. When a game ball is received in the first housing portion 64c1, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 3) due to the weight of the game ball. Guide to the first discharge guide path 64z1 leading to the discharge port 650a1. Here, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left and right directions (rotation angle with the state where the magnet 64b1 is directed vertically upward as the origin), and the first accommodating rotation part 64c1. A magnet 64b1 is provided at the tip of the boundary wall with the second housing portion 64d1.

  The distribution winning device 64 includes the second distribution rotation member 64a2, the third distribution rotation member 64a3, the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and the fifth distribution, which are configured in the same manner as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. A rotation member 64a5, a sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, a seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively attached. The second distribution rotation member 64a2 is attached to a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d1 receive the game balls rolled on the first guide path 64z2 on the lower right side of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. It has been. On the lower left side of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, there is a third position where the game balls distributed by the first housing portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 are received by the game balls that have rolled on the second guide path 64z4. A sorting rotation member 64a3 is attached. The fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is attached to a position where the game ball distributed by the second storage portion 64d3 receives the game ball rolled on the third guide path 64z6 at the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3. Has been. A fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is attached to a position diagonally below and to the left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 at a position where the game ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c4 is received by the game ball rolled on the fourth guide path 64z8. ing. The sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is attached to the lower right of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d5 receive the game balls rolled on the fifth guide path 64z10. Has been. A seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is attached to a position on the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 at a position where the game ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c6 is received by the game ball rolled on the sixth guide path 64z12. ing. The eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is attached to the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 at a position where the game ball distributed by the second storage portion 64d7 receives the game ball rolled on the seventh guide path 64z14. Has been. The second to eighth distribution rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are a game ball flowing down the first to seventh guide paths 64z2 to 64z14 and magnets 64b1 to 64b1 at positions of the respective distribution rotating members facing the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it collides with 64b8.

  The back side base body to which the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are attached includes a first base side magnet 900a1, a second base side magnet 900a2, a third base side magnet 900a3, and a fourth base side magnet. 900a4, fifth base side magnet 900a5, sixth base side magnet 900a6, seventh base side magnet 900a7, and eighth base side magnet 900a8 are arranged. The first to eighth base-side magnets 900a1 to 900a8 face the position where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 face vertically upward and to the positions facing each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Are arranged as follows.

  More specifically, the magnet 64b1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the first base-side magnet 900a1 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the back-side base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. . The first base-side magnet 900a1 is arranged and fixed so that the front end portion faces the first sorting rotation member 64a1.

  Similarly to the first base side magnet 900a1, the magnet 64b1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and the first sorting rotation is performed so that the tip portion faces the first base side magnet 900a1 side. It is fixed to the member 64a1. The first base rotating magnet 64a1 rotates and the first base-side magnet 900a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are positioned at a position where the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is directly above (on the center line of the entrance 640). The magnet 64b1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is the closest position (tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the right or left.

  As a result, when the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is at a position (vertical upper position) on the center line of the entrance 640, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 And the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates to the left or right, and either the first accommodation part 64c1 or the second accommodation part 64d1 is assigned to the prize distribution device. 64 is directed to the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the ball 64. Therefore, the entered game ball comes into contact with the boundary wall between the first storage portion 64c1 and the second storage portion 64d1 to cause a clogged ball, or the game ball is stored in the first distribution turning member 64a1 in the first storage. It is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the left or right without being accommodated in the portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion d1.

  Further, the magnet 64b1 and the first base side magnet 900a1 repel, for example, so that the first storage portion 64c1 receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and moves the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1. It is possible to prevent the first sorting rotating member 64a1 from rotating rightward (the first housing portion 64c1 faces upward) after the guiding. Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first discharge guiding path 64z1, the second storage portion 64d1 is directed upward, and the game ball that has entered the first distribution prize device 64a1 is the second The storage portion 64d1 receives the first sorting rotating member 64a1 to the right by about 180 degrees from the state by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first guide path 64z2. In this way, the first distribution rotating member 64a1 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2 and win the game.

  The second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are also configured by the same mechanism as the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are normally configured to rotate according to the weight of the game ball. As will be described later, the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to perform main control. In the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the apparatus 110, in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015), the distribution position adjustment motor 263 of the distribution winning apparatus 64 sets the first position to a predetermined initial position. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 rotate to predetermined initial positions (in this embodiment, the positions at which the game balls are respectively guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15). Moved and set. Here, the initial position is a position when the value of a distribution winning ball counter 203e, which will be described later, is 0 (a state where 0 or 256 gaming balls have entered the distribution winning device 64). “1” indicating that the first housing portion 64c1 of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is facing upward, and the second housing portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is facing upward. “0” indicating this, “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c3 of the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is facing upward, and the second accommodating portion 64d4 of the fourth distributing rotating member 64a4 “0” indicating the position facing upward, “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c5 of the fifth sorting rotating member 64a5 is facing upward, the sixth sorting rotating member At a position where the second accommodating portion 64d6 of 64a6 faces upward “0” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the seventh sorting rotating member 64a7 is in a position facing upward, and the first accommodating portion 64d8 of the eighth distributing rotating member 64a8. Is set to the initial position by setting “10101010” as continuous data.

  In addition, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 distributes the game balls to the first guide path 64z2, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 transfers the game balls flowing down the first guide path 64z2 to the first storage portion 64c2. It receives in the 2nd accommodating part 64d2, and guides to the 2nd discharge guidance path 64z3 or the 2nd guidance path 64z4. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 rotate the eighth distribution rotation by continuously guiding the game balls from the first guide path 64z2 to the seventh guide path 64z14. A game ball reaches the member 64a8. When a game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 64c8 of the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 and distributed to the eighth guide path 64z16, the game ball flowing down the eighth guide path 64z16 is guided to the first start port 71. And enter.

  In a state in which the gaming machine is initialized, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 to the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 guide the gaming balls from the first discharge guiding path 64z1 to the eighth discharging guiding path 64z15, respectively. Placed in position.

  Specifically, the first, third, fifth, and seventh distribution rotating members 64a1, 64a3, 64a5, and 64a7 are located at positions where the first housing portions 64c1, 64c3, 64c5, and 64c7 face upward (the right side). The position rotated to the maximum angle in the direction) is set. On the other hand, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth distribution rotating members 64a2, 64a4, 64a6, and 64a8 are positions where the second housing portions 64d2, 64d4, 64d6, and 64d8 face the upper side of the gaming machine (maximum in the left direction). It is set in a state where it is rotated to an angle rotated position.

  Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance 640 from the initial state, the game ball that entered the first ball enters the first housing portion 64c1, and the first sorting rotation member 64a1 rotates to the left. Then, it is guided to the first discharge guiding path 64z1. As a result, the game balls are discharged to the sorting prize device 64 to the outside. At this time, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is stopped at a position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 faces upward. Then, the second game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, and the first sorting rotation member 64a2 rotates to the right. The game balls are distributed to the first guide path 64z2. The game ball that has flowed down the first guiding path 64z2 enters the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2, and the second sorting rotating member 64a2 rotates rightward, and the second discharging guiding path 64z3. The game balls are distributed to each other.

  Next, the third game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the first accommodating portion 64c1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 and is distributed to the first discharge guiding path 64z1. The game ball that has entered the fourth ball enters the second housing portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, is guided to the first guide path 64z2, and enters the first housing portion 64c2 of the second sorting rotation member 64a2. A game ball enters and is distributed to the second guide path 64z4. As described above, it is necessary for four game balls to enter the entrance 640 before the second distribution rotating member 64a2 distributes the game balls to the second guide path 64z4. Similarly, it is necessary for eight game balls to enter the entrance 640 until the third sorting rotation member 64a3 guides the game balls to the third guide path 64z6. Similarly, the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4 has 16 balls, the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 has 32 balls, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 has 64 balls, the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 has 128 balls, and the eighth vibration. In the minute rotation member 64a8, 256 balls are required to distribute the game balls from the fourth guide path 64z8 to the eighth guide path 64z16.

  That is, 256 game balls enter the distribution prize device 64 from the initial state of the distribution prize device 64 (0 game balls entered) until the game balls enter the first start port 71. Need to sphere. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the first start port 71, it is determined to be a big hit (all big hit random numbers are determined to be a big win), so once for 256 balls entered Is a configuration that always generates a big hit. By configuring in this way, the player can play a game for the purpose of causing more game balls to enter the distribution prize winning device 64, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored early. Can do.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670a1 for detecting the stop position, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 guides the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1 (first Main controller 110 whether the first storage portion 64c1 is facing upward) or a state in which a game ball is guided to the first guide path 64z2 (second storage portion 64d1 is facing upward). The MPU 201 can be detected. Similarly, a rotation angle sensor 670a2 is provided for the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a rotation angle sensor 670a3 is provided for the third distribution rotation member 64a3, and a rotation angle sensor 670a4 is provided for the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4. The distribution rotation member 64a5 has a rotation angle sensor 670a5, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has a rotation angle sensor 670a6, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 has a rotation angle sensor 670a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Are provided with rotation angle sensors 670a8, respectively.

  The rotation angle sensors 670a1 to 670a8 constitute the distribution position confirmation sensor 262, and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 connect the first housing portions 64c1 to 64c8 to the main controller 110. In the state of turning to the position facing upward of the machine 10 (position turned to the right), “1” indicating a positive rotation angle is output, and the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 are directed upward. In the state of being rotated to the facing position (position rotated to the left), “0” indicating a negative rotation angle is output.

  Note that the game ball guided to the first discharge guiding path 64z1 passes through the first discharge port 650a1, is discharged to the outside of the distribution winning device 64, and flows down the front of the game board 13 again. The first outlet 650a1 is composed of a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed, and is configured to be detectable by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. With the same configuration, the game ball guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 is from the second discharge port 650a2, and the game ball guided to the third discharge guide path 64z5 is from the third discharge port 650a3 to the fourth discharge guide path. The game ball guided to 64z7 is from the fourth discharge port 650a4, the game ball guided to the fifth discharge guide path 64z9 is from the fifth discharge port 650a5, and the game ball guided to the sixth discharge guide path 64z11 is sixth. The game balls guided from the discharge port 650a6 to the seventh discharge guide path 64z13 are discharged from the seventh discharge port 650a7, and the game balls guided to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15 are discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Since the game balls that have passed through the ball entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are respectively detected by the sensors, the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can grasp the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can recognize the number of game balls entering the allocation prize winning device 64 necessary until the next big hit. Therefore, when a game ball wins the first start port 71, whether the number of game balls that have entered the distribution start device 64 is the number that wins the first start port 71 (this implementation). In the embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is illegally awarded to the first starting port 71 by determining 256).

  Further, by grasping the number of game balls currently entering the distribution prize device 64, it is possible to recognize whether there is an illegally entered game ball. Specifically, for example, when a hole is made from the outside of the distribution prize winning device 64 and a game ball is entered from other than the passage port 640, the number of discharges is greater than the number of passages. Therefore, it is possible to recognize fraud.

  Furthermore, even when a problem occurs in which the game balls are clogged in the distribution winning device 64, there is a difference in the number of game balls that have passed through the ball entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Since the notification is given when the number reaches a certain number (10 in the present embodiment), the clogged ball can be found at an early stage and the game store can eliminate the clogged ball.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is located at the lower right of the first sorting rotating member 64a1, and the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is located at the lower left of the second sorting rotating member 64a2. The fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is located at the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3, the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the lower left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the right. A sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is disposed below, a seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is disposed at the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is disposed at the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7. By doing so, as compared with the configuration in which the sorting rotation members are arranged in the left direction or the right direction, the use of the space in the left-right direction can be suppressed, and the sorting and winning device 64 can be configured in a compact manner.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are arranged alternately (zigzag positions) as shown in FIG. 3, but arranged side by side in one direction in the left or right direction. Thus, when setting the initial position, the setting can be made by moving all the sorting rotating members in one direction, so that the initial position setting process can be facilitated.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and ten sorting rotating members may be arranged. You may comprise so that less than eight may be arrange | positioned. In this way, by changing the number of distribution rotating members, it is possible to change the number of game balls that are required until the first start port 71 wins, and to adjust the probability of obtaining a big hit. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of distribution rotation members can be adjusted in the game store side. Specifically, the distribution rotating member and the start port are configured to be removable, and the game store side attaches and sets it according to the circumstances, so that the game can be performed with the adjustment according to the convenience of the game store. be able to. Moreover, since it can be changed according to the day, it is possible to adjust the balance between the game store and the player so that the balance is appropriate by changing the sales.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting port 71, the random number value is set so that it is determined to be all winning, but not limited to this, the jackpot probability may be set as appropriate. Good.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64. 4 indicates the flow direction of the game ball guided to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16, and OUT indicates the game guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15. The flow direction of the sphere is shown.

  Although omitted in FIG. 3, as shown in FIG. 4, the first to eighth facing members 64 t <b> 1 to 64 t <b> 8 are provided on the facing surfaces of the first to eighth guide paths 64 z <b> 2 to 64 z <b> 16 of the distribution winning device 64. Each is provided. The first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 are configured by wall portions protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Has been. Further, even when the game balls flowing down the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 are strong, the game balls are guided by the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8, so that the game balls are moved to the first to eighth The problem of being discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 without being guided to the sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. As will be described later, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% (no random number value determined to be a win is set). On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the winning probability is set to 100% (all random values are determined to be winning).

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is set to 0% in the normal gaming state (non-temporary time), but this is not restrictive, and the winning probability (with a low probability of winning is not limited). For example, it may be configured to be set to 1/1000. Here, in the normal gaming state, a game ball is fired to the right side of the game area, that is, the right side (a game method in which the normal symbol starting port 67 is made to win a game ball in order to win the normal symbol). It is not necessary to set the probability to be advantageous to the player by being performed.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory is activated, and the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, which is normally maintained in the upright state, are substantially V to V. It moves in the shape of a letter (inverted C shape) and the game balls are guided by the blades 300a and 300b, so that the game balls can be easily entered for a predetermined time (3 s in this embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose variation display has not been executed among the balls won in the normal symbol starting port 67, by a lighting state. The number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left and right 7-segment LEDs, a special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game based on the winning of the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the center of 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning at the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. The segment is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center one segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “33” and “77” corresponding to the win is displayed. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, it is always determined that the game is a big win (the values of all the random symbols C1 per special symbol are determined to be a big win). Therefore, the design of the special symbol is started and stopped, and the symbol displayed as a big hit is a symbol.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 71 or the second start port 300, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery) is determined, and the type of the big hit is also determined. Do. As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot type determined here is jackpot A (100 times of the 16R jackpot normal symbol short time period, that is, the jackpot with a short time), jackpot B (16R jackpot normal symbol of the short time period 0 times, In other words, a big hit without a short time) is prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, “77” is displayed for jackpot A and “33” is displayed for jackpot B, for example).

  Here, the “big hit A” is a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and after the big hit, the game shifts to a short-time gaming state, which will be described later. At this time, in the short game state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the probability of being determined to be a win is 0% (no random number determined to be a win) to 100% (all random values are hit). To be determined) and set. The short-time gaming state is continuously executed until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100, and when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100, the normal game state is entered. Here, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the probability that it is determined to be a win is set to 0%.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a special symbol (third symbol) while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 as a trigger. ), A third symbol display device 81 is provided which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”).

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are special symbols. Displayed as one of the following. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol similar to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a pseudo symbol. Although the pseudo symbol will be described later, a variation of the pseudo symbol is displayed in a predetermined variation pattern based on the fact that a game similar to the special symbol has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation prize winning device 64. Done. In the case of the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display is started also in the first symbol display device 37, but for the pseudo symbol, the pseudo symbol variable display is performed only by the third symbol display device 81. .

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 71 or the second start opening 300, it is determined that all are winning, and therefore, as a special symbol variation pattern, the first start opening 71 is won. In this case, a variation pattern that is a big hit for each of the second start port 300 is set.

  FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern of a special symbol selected based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed a certain normal special fluctuation pattern. When the game symbol is won at the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not being displayed, the left, middle and right symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) are looped (1 → 2 →・ →→ 9 → 1) The display of fluctuation is started at high speed in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is variably displayed at a low speed. When reaching the reach state, the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the characters “heaven reach!” Are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that a game ball has won is displayed at the first start port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, if a game ball wins the first start opening 71, the game machine will always be a big hit, so the player recognizes that if the first start opening 71 wins, the player will win a big hit. . For this reason, the player is directly connected to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in this embodiment) that the game ball will win at the first start port 71 enters the distribution prize winning device 64. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls necessary to win the first starting port 71 have entered the allocation winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the characters “arrival in heaven !!”. Can be recognized as a big hit.

  FIG. 11 (b) shows a variation in the ceiling variation pattern selected when the number of game balls that have entered the allocation prize winning device 64 is 256 out of the pseudo symbol variation patterns shown in FIG. 10 (a). It is the figure shown about the special variation pattern of a ceiling which is a variation pattern of a special symbol selected when a game ball wins in the 1st starting slot 71 and a variation display of a special symbol is started when it is displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the pseudo-pattern ceiling fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start to be displayed at high speed in ascending order (see FIG. 11B). Not shown). Next, the left and right pseudo-symbols of the same number (in the upper part of FIG. 11B, the left and right pseudo-symbols stop at “7”) are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Is done. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and the closed door symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 11 (b), when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, the pseudo displayed on the upper left is displayed. The symbol is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made.

  This ceiling variation pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first entry port 71 after entering the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 (the time set at the time of design). The variable time is set in. Therefore, since the game ball will win the first start port 71 when the variation time ends after the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern is started, the replacement to the special symbol is performed smoothly, It can prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to identify whether the variation is a variation of the pseudo symbol or the variation of the special symbol, and the variation of the pseudo symbol based on the entrance to the entrance 640 that does not win the first starting port 71. Even with the display, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit (winning the first starting port 71).

  Further, when switching from the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern to the ceiling special variation pattern of the special symbol, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, and then the variation display of the ceiling special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to start.

  FIG. 12 shows a special symbol selected when a game ball is won at the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed with a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern on the third symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the switching special fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 12, when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, if a game ball wins the first starting port 71, the switching is performed as shown in the diagram of FIG. By starting the variation display of the special symbol in the special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol that has been variably displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. Thereafter, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in a “reach state” in which they are stopped and displayed, and the characters “arrival in heaven!” Are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol “777” is stopped and displayed to notify the player that the player has won a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a big win, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not used. Can be made. Further, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste and to focus on the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. The first start port 71 and the second start port 300 are also one of the winning ports from which three balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the big win of the lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big win, the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which a ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type, and both jackpot A and jackpot B can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating winning based on winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, the variable winning device 65 is based on the jackpot type. The opening / closing operation is set, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63, 65 a, 71, 300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 5, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores various data and control programs for executing these processes, and the RAM 203 has a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Is provided.

  Here, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a random number table 202a per special symbol, a special hit type table 202b, a random number table 202c per ordinary symbol, a variation pattern table 202d for jackpots, a variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e, for ordinary symbols At least a stop type command 202f, arrival average number of seconds data 202g, distribution initial position data 202h, distribution accessory position data 202i, and ceiling arrival frequency data 202j are set (stored).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol random number table 202a receives the value of the random symbol counter C1 per special symbol acquired when a game ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. It is a data table in which random values determined to be stored are stored. In the present embodiment, all the special symbol random number counters C1 values (0 to 109) are stored in the special symbol random number table 202a as random numbers determined to be successful. In the present embodiment, the setting is made so that all the random number values are determined to be wins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number value determined to be a win may be set as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the special hit type table 202b is a table for determining the type of jackpot to be executed when a big hit is made in a lottery game lottery. In the present embodiment, after the 16R jackpot is executed, the jackpot A in which the short-time gaming state is set and the jackpot B in which the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state) is set after the 16R jackpot is executed are set. ing. If the value of the special hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired when a game ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is “0 to 79”, the big hit A is set ( If it is “80 to 99”, the special hit type table 202b is set so that the big hit B is set (determined).

  As shown in FIG. 8C, the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol stores the random number value of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol determined to be a hit in the normal gaming state (non-short game state) and the short-time gaming state. This is a data table. In the present embodiment, no random value that is determined to be a winning is set in the normal gaming state. That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that all the random symbol counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 are out of place. In the short-time gaming state, all random numbers are set in the normal symbol random number table 202c as random numbers determined to be winning. That is, in the short-time gaming state, it is determined that all the random symbol counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 are hit.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d stores a variation display mode (dynamic display mode) for winning a special symbol. In the present embodiment, when game balls win at the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, all wins and there is no case of losing, so only a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for big hits is set. ing. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, dedicated jackpot variation patterns are set for the winnings of the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, respectively.

  The jackpot variation pattern for winning at the first start port 71 is selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in the normal special variation pattern or the ceiling variation pattern selected when the variation of the pseudo symbol is stopped. A switching special variation pattern that is selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a special variation pattern other than the ceiling special variation pattern and the ceiling variation pattern is set.

  As a jackpot variation pattern for winning at the second starting port 300, a short time special variation pattern is set. The short-time special variation pattern is configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, and a configuration in which a predetermined symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is suddenly displayed in a state where all the symbols are aligned and is notified that a big hit has been made. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the short-time game state can be shortened, and the player can suppress getting bored with the game early because the jackpots are generated at short intervals. Further, the game store side can shorten the time during the short game when the game ball is not consumed, and can increase sales.

  The variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e is a variation pattern table in which the variation display mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is stored. When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are turned on alternately for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), a normal symbol (“○” or “×” symbol in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). . If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variation patterns of normal symbols are set in the variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e. Both the hit variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern are set with a variation time of 3 seconds. As described above, since the variation time of the normal symbol is composed of a short variation time, the time-short gaming state can be further shortened. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games by efficiently using the game time. In addition, more sales can be made for the game store.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202f stores a command corresponding to a normal symbol hit / miss stop type.

  The average arrival time data 202g is the average number of seconds data calculated at the time of designing the time required for a game ball to enter the first start port 71 after the game ball has entered the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. It is remembered. In the present embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is stored as “5 to 7 seconds”.

  In this embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is configured to be set in advance based on the design value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball may be entered from the ball opening 640 and the arrival average number of seconds may be set based on the time required to enter the game, or each time the first start opening 71 is won. It is also possible to configure so that the number of seconds to reach is measured and the average number of seconds is updated each time. By configuring in this way, even when the arrival seconds differ for each gaming machine due to the difference in accuracy of the members constituting the distribution winning device 64, the accurate arrival seconds can be set. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not fraud has been performed.

  Further, as described above, when the arrival average seconds are measured and set for each pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the pseudo ceiling fluctuation pattern is determined based on the arrival average seconds that are measured and set. Etc. may be set. By configuring in this way, switching from the pseudo symbol to the special symbol can be performed smoothly and naturally, so that the player can be prevented from feeling more uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 flow down the upper surface of the game board 13 and are discharged from the out port 66. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a common guide path through which game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 flow down may be provided to guide to the general winning port. When a game ball enters the general winning opening, for example, a configuration in which prize balls such as three balls are paid out to the player may be used. With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 can perform the effect of whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the general entrance or the first start port 71. It is possible to improve the game preference. Also, the base of the pachinko machine 10 (the difference between the game ball that has been launched and the game ball that has been paid out) until the prize is awarded to the first start port 71 by playing a prize in the general prize opening and paying out the prize ball. It can be adjusted so that it is not too disadvantageous for the player (the player's investment amount becomes too large).

  The distribution initial position data 202h stores the initial positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. The initial position here stores the positions at which the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game balls to the first to eighth discharge guiding paths 64z1 to 64z15, respectively. The distribution initial position data 202h is assigned to the distribution winning device 64 in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015) executed in the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on. Used when initializing.

  The allocated character position data 202i corresponds to the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning device 64 (value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e). The positions of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 (the positions where the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward or the positions where the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward) are stored.

  Specifically, if the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 0 (the state where 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64), the first distribution rotating member 64a1 has the first value. “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c1 is facing upward, “0” indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is facing upward, “1” indicating that the first housing portion 64c3 of the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is facing upward, and the second housing portion 64d4 of the fourth sorting rotating member 64a4 is facing upward. “0” indicating that the first receiving portion 64c5 of the fifth sorting rotating member 64a5 is in a position facing upward, and the second receiving portion 64d6 of the sixth distributing rotating member 64a6 “0” indicating that the position is facing upward, the seventh vibration “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the rotating member 64a7 is facing upward, and indicating that the first accommodating portion 64d8 of the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 is facing upward. “10101010” is set as data in which “0” is continuous. Note that “10101010” is set in the above-described distribution initial position data 202h.

  If the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 1 (one game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64), the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 faces upward. Since it moves to the position, “00101010” changed to “0” indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is directed upward is set.

  As described above, the position to the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at the time when the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64 is converted into data in the sorting role position data 202i. And stored as data tables. In this distributed character position data 202i, the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is “0 to 255” (0 to 255 balls have been entered into the sorting winning device 64 (the state where 256 balls have been entered is 0). It is set corresponding to each value up to))).

  The positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected by the output value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262. The distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The positions where the magnets 64b1 to b8 face the game machine vertically upward are set to 0 degrees. When the magnets 64b1 to b8 are rotated to the right, the position is set to a positive value. When the magnets 64b1 to b8 are rotated to the left, the position is set to a negative value. . Therefore, if the value of the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 is a positive value, it is determined that the first storage parts 64c1 to 8c are facing upward (the data of the sorting tool position data 202i is “1”). Determined). On the other hand, if the value of the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 is a negative value, it is determined that the second storage portions 64d1-8 are facing upward (the data of the sorting tool position data 202i is “0”). Determined).

  The number-of-arrival-ceiling data 202j stores the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e from the initial state until the gaming ball wins the first starting port 71 from the initial state. That is, the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 necessary for winning the game balls at the first start port 71 is stored. The ceiling arrival frequency data 202j is provided for recognizing the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e necessary until the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 wins the first start port 71. In the present embodiment, when 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64, the 256th game ball wins the first start port 71, that is, the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 255. 1 is added to 1 and updated to 0, the value of the allocated winning ball counter 203e is 0 (not including 0 set by initialization) in the ceiling arrival count data 202j. Is set. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 from 255 to the number-of-winning winning ball counter 203e and updating it to 0 corresponds to the ceiling arrival frequency data 202j.

  In the present embodiment, the ceiling arrival number 202j is set in advance. However, when the distributed winning ball counter 203e is incremented by 1 from 255 and updated to 0, the 256th is distributed. A ceiling arrival flag indicating that the player has entered the winning device 64 may be set and turned on.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special symbol random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 is used. Further, a random symbol per normal symbol C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the random symbol per normal symbol C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol execution area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning for the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. Also, when the special symbol is changing, each counter value is not acquired, and only the winning ball (three game balls in this embodiment) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, with respect to the winning of the first starting opening 71 or the second starting opening 300, the setting as a holding ball is not provided when a winning is made during the change of the special symbol, but not limited thereto. , You may set the reserve ball with or without the upper limit.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The random number counter C1 per special symbol is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 109 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 109). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C1 per special symbol. That is, for example, when the random counter C1 per special symbol is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 109, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27).

  The value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203c1 corresponding to the winning start opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the random number table 202a per special symbol (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is the value per special symbol. A jackpot is determined when it matches the value of a random jackpot set in the random number table 202a (in this embodiment, “0 to 109”).

  The random symbol counter C1 per special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-109. In this special symbol random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 110, and “0 to 109” is stored in the special symbol random number table 202a. That is, the values of all the special symbol random number counters C1 are determined to be big hits.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). After reaching the value, it returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a of the RAM 203.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Based on the special hit type counter C2 and the special hit type table 202b (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202, the big hit type is determined. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, as described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, “short jackpot A” in which the short-time gaming state is set after the jackpot game, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds There is a “big hit B” in which a normal gaming state (non-temporary gaming state) is set after the game.

  In the special hit type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, the value “0 to 79” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A, and the value “80 to 99” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot B. ing.

  When the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a value that is a big hit (in this embodiment, all values are set to values that become a big hit), the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is determined from the special hit type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the jackpot B is determined as the jackpot type. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the special hit type table 202b is defined so that the jackpot A is selected with a probability of about 80% when the jackpot is hit, and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 20%. Yes.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the random symbol counter C4 per normal symbol. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number that is the winning set by the normal symbol random number table 202c.

  Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). The The number of random number values determined to be winning is 0 in the normal gaming state, that is, the normal symbol is not winning in the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state). In the short-time gaming state, the number is 100, and the range is “0 to 99”, that is, since it is determined that all random numbers are hit, the normal design starting port 67 is inserted into the game ball. If it passes, it will be a winning structure. When it is determined that it is a win, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are displayed in the short-time game. In the state, the operation of releasing for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed once (in the normal game state, since the normal symbol is not set, all the symbols are removed). The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 99), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (FIG. 27, S1200).

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, when the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203b for the number of holdings (normal symbol holdings 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the random number counter C4 for normal symbols. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON, and the variable symbol display based on the random number value is stopped or held. If the data is shifted to the previous reserved area due to digestion, the data is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 includes a special symbol execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a short and medium counter 203d, a distributed winning ball number counter 203e, a distributed discharging ball number counter 203f, and a distributed winning timer. 203g, distribution prize flag 203h, and other memory area 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting to display the special symbol in a variable manner. This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired when a game ball wins the starting opening 300. Each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is cleared (erased) to 0 when the special symbol stops changing.

  Specifically, the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203a stores the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol and the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning prize. The When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 71 during the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), each value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol and the special type counter C2 from the counter buffer Are stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203a. When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing for starting the execution of the variation effect (the data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a while the special symbol is stopped), the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37, or the third symbol Processing such as display setting of the display device 81 is executed.

  When each value of the counters C1 to C3 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a, the MPU 201 stores the data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a as a special symbol described later. With reference to the variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per normal symbol acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of a start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter random number counter C4 from the counter buffer is detected from the counter buffer. Is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag) can be stored (held) up to four times. . In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize) are sequentially from the holding area with the fastest order of digestion in the holding area where the data is vacant ( A reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved balls) is stored.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the ball storage area 203b (value of the normal random number counter C4), data corresponding to one start winning is provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Shift to the normal symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c passes the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”). The number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed on the second symbol display device 83) based on the It is a counter for counting. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 24, S1014). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S805 in FIG. 21).

  The hour / medium counter 203d is a counter area in which the number of hour / hours 100 is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A is executed. When the time reduction count is set, until the time reduction count is set to 0, the normal symbol random number table for the short symbol gaming state is set in the normal symbol random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the operation of opening the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory in the opening time (1 s in this embodiment). Is executed once.

  The hour / short counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol stops variably displaying. When the hour / hour counter 203d becomes 0, the state shifts from the hour / short gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol per random symbol 202c A random number table per normal symbol for the normal gaming state (non-short game state) is set.

  The distribution winning ball counter 203e is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball wins a ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. In the state in which the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the distribution winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later. If it is determined, 1 is added. It is initialized to 0 when the jackpot game is started.

  The distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is a counter that is incremented by one each time a game ball passes through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64. In the state in which the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and in the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, the game balls are first to eighth discharge ports. When it is determined that any one of 650a1 to 650a8 has been passed, 1 is added. Note that, based on the start of the jackpot game, the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is initialized.

  In the present embodiment, the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is configured to count the number of game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. When winning a prize, 1 may be added, and when the game ball is discharged from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, the count value may be decremented by one. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls being won in the distribution winning device 64.

  When the game ball passes through the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the distribution winning timer 203g adds the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e to the set counter value (in this embodiment, 1 is added from 255). If it is updated 0), it is a timer for measuring the flow time of the game ball. That is, the value of the distribution prize counter 203e is 0 updated by adding 1 from 255. This means that the 256th game ball has entered, so after entering the entrance 640. The time until entering the first start port 71 is measured.

  When the game ball passes through the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 and the start of measurement is set. In the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, 1 is added if the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero.

  The distribution winning flag 203h is a flag indicating that the 256th game ball (the distribution winning ball number counter 203e) has entered the distribution winning device 64. Specifically, the distribution winning flag 203g is a distribution winning ball when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the value of the number counter 203e is the set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255), that is, the 256th game ball has entered the distribution prize device 64. If set to ON. Further, in the start winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 20, S107), when a game ball enters the first start port 71, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to OFF. Is done. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 203i is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, when it is determined that the 256th game ball, which is the number of game balls to be awarded to the first start port 71, has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the game ball is Since the flow-down time until winning at the first starting port 71 is measured, if the game ball wins the first starting port 71 in a time longer or shorter than a time expected in advance by design, fraud It is possible to suppress fraud by determining that there is a possibility of being performed and notifying an error or the like.

  If it is determined that the number of game balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that will win the first start port 71 has entered the distribution winning device 64, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By setting to, it becomes possible to determine in advance that the first start opening 71 is won and to execute control, and when the first start opening 71 wins, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By determining whether or not the distribution winning flag 203h is off, if a winning occurs at the first starting port 71, an error or the like is notified, thereby causing the first starting port 71 due to fraud. The winning prize can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, at least a pseudo fluctuation table 222a and a background selection table 222b are set. Although not shown, the ROM 222 also stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, fixed value data, and the like.

  In the pseudo fluctuation table 222a, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), the fluctuation pattern for variably displaying the pseudo symbols on the third symbol display device 81 is the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d and the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. Are stored in correspondence with each other value. As the types of fluctuation patterns, a normal deviation fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach A fluctuation pattern, a super reach B fluctuation pattern, a precursor fluctuation pattern, and a ceiling fluctuation pattern are set.

  In the normal deviation variation pattern, numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a line on the left, middle, and right, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in ascending order for a predetermined time (for example, 2 Second), the display is stopped and displayed with different numbers (for example, “456”, etc.) in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The variation time from the start of variation until all pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed is 3 seconds.

  In the normal reach variation pattern, three symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle and right, and for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), After the pseudo symbols change in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “REACH” is output from the audio output device 226 to reach the reach state. After that, the middle symbols are displayed at a low speed and displayed in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed with a symbol (for example, “757” etc.) different from the left and right symbols. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 10 seconds.

  In the Super Reach A variation pattern, three symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle and right, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are displayed in a changing manner in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped by the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “Leach” is output from the audio output device 226. After reaching the reach state, a character (for example, a girl in a swimsuit with a polka dot pattern) different from the number pseudo-pattern is displayed. The middle symbols and symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed together with the character, and the girl stops the numeric symbols and stops at a numeric symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the numerical symbol display to the stop display of all the numeric symbols is 15 seconds.

  The super reach B variation pattern differs from the super reach A variation pattern in the girl's swimsuit as a displayed character. Specifically, a girl wearing a red swimsuit is displayed. For other points, the same variable display as in Super Reach A is performed.

  The predictive reach variation pattern is a number of 1-9 symbol designs, which are one of the pseudo symbols, displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols fluctuate and display in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226 to reach After entering the state, the text “A little more to heaven!” Is displayed. The middle symbol is displayed at low speed and fluctuating in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed with a symbol (for example, “757” etc.) different from the left and right symbols. The variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 20 seconds. In this way, by displaying the characters “a little more to the heavens!”, The player can count the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 to win the first start port 71. You can recognize that you are approaching.

  This predictor variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected only when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d is “201 to 254”. Therefore, the value of the player's follow-up winning game number counter 223d It is also a variation pattern for informing (value range).

  As for the ceiling variation pattern, the numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a horizontal row on the left, middle, and right, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols change and display in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “REACH” is output from the audio output device 226. After reaching the reach state, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the three numeric symbols are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, and a picture of the closed door is displayed. . Until the picture of the closed door is displayed, it is composed of a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and the middle symbol is variably displayed at a high speed.

  The ceiling variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d is 255, and is selected when a game ball is to be won at the first start port 71. That is, the ceiling variation pattern is configured in a variation manner that is connected to the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, in order to link with the variation of the special symbol, the average time required for the game ball to pass through the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 and win the first start port 71 is 5 seconds to 7 seconds. It consists of a 6 second variation time within the second range. Thereby, when a game ball wins the 1st starting opening 71, it can switch to the change display of a special symbol smoothly, and it can control giving a player a sense of incongruity. Moreover, it can switch more smoothly by setting it as the intermediate | middle time of average time.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d increases, it is difficult to select the normal deviation variation pattern (the number of values assigned to the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is small). Yes. Further, if the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is large (for example, “201 to 254”), the super reach A variation pattern is easily selected (the number of values assigned to the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is large). ) Is configured as follows. Accordingly, if the frequency of displaying the super reach A variation pattern increases, the number of game balls won in the distribution winning device 64 may be close to the number that will be won in the first start port 71. Can make people expect. Further, when the game is started, it is not known what the state of the distribution winning device 64 (the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8) is. I am interested in how much a game ball must be awarded to the entrance 640 of the sorting prize-winning device 64 before winning a prize. Here, the selection rate is changed in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64 (the value of the secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d) as the type of the variation pattern that is variably displayed with the pseudo symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the number of balls entered into the current distribution winning device 64. Therefore, the player can be interested in even the pseudo-pattern variation pattern selected regardless of the jackpot determination, and can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the background selection table 222b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d and the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a. Multiple background images are set. As background image types, a normal background, a precursor A background, a precursor B background, and a precursor C background are set.

  The normal background is a blue background image (not shown). As shown in FIG. 13C, the precursor A background is a background image indicating “sunny” in which a sun symbol is displayed on the upper right on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13D, the precursor B background is a background image indicating “cloudy” in which white clouds are displayed on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13E, the precursor C background is a background image showing a “storm” in which a black rain cloud is displayed on a normal blue background and a rain is displayed from the rain cloud.

  When the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d is increased, the proportion of the precursor A background is reduced, and the proportion of the precursor B background and the precursor C background is increased. In addition, when the value of the follower distribution winning ball number counter 223d is 255 (that is, the number of winning balls (256 in this embodiment) that will be awarded to the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64). When the ball enters), the precursor C background is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a.

  Specifically, when the value of the follow-up winning prize winning number counter 223d is “0 to 60”, of the 199 values of the pseudo selection counter 223a, 30 are the precursor A background and 19 are the precursor B background, 9 are assigned to the precursor C background. Similarly, when the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball number counter 223d is “61 to 149”, 25 are assigned to the precursor A background, 24 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 9 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is “150 to 200”, 10 are assigned to the precursor A background, 29 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 19 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is “201 to 254”, 6 are assigned to the precursor A background, 33 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 29 are assigned to the precursor C background.

  Thus, when the value approaches “255”, which is the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won at the first starting port 71, the precursor B background and the precursor C background are selected. A large percentage is set. Further, when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won at the first starting port 71 is “255”, the precursor C background is selected. When a game ball wins at the start port 71, the sign C background is often displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player will play a game with the expectation that he will win the first starting port 71 when the precursor C background is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the precursor B background or the precursor C background is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player receives the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 at the first start port 71. A game can be performed with the expectation that it will be close to the number of balls to be won (256 in this embodiment). In addition, since the selection ratio of the background type selected by the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 is changed and set, the number of balls entered into the current sorting device 64 depending on the type of background image selected. Can be enjoyed by the player. Therefore, even if the number of balls entered into the allocation prize-winning device 64 is actually 50, when the precursor C background is selected and displayed, the player is not close to 256 balls. The game can be continued with expectation. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Note that the background image selection will be described later. In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the number of balls that have entered (remaining) the distribution winning device 64 is determined. When the value of the pay-in prize counter 223f shown is greater than 3, the background image is selected, and the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the selected background image.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a follower-dispensed ball number counter 223e, a pay-in prize counter 223f, and other memory areas 223g. ing.

  The pseudo variation selection counter 223a is a counter that is used when a pseudo pattern variation pattern is selected from the pseudo variation table 222a or a background image is selected from the background selection table 222b. The pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is a counter value composed of values ranging from 0 to 198, and is updated by adding one by one in the main process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When 1 is added to the upper limit “198”, the value is updated to 0, which is the initial value. When the power is turned on, the initial value is set to 0.

  The variation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that a variation pattern command of a special symbol has been received from the main controller 110. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received in the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. Is set to ON. Further, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, it is set to OFF.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is a flag indicating that a stop type command output from the main controller 110 has been received. When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to off. In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the stop type command output from the main control device 110 has been received, the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on. Is set. Further, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64. When the secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d receives the allocation winning ball number command output from the main controller 110, it is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the allocation winning ball number command is a value indicating 0, the value obtained by subtracting 1 is 255. That is, the value “0-255” of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d corresponds to the number of game balls entered into the sort prize-winning device 64 from 1 to 256 respectively (follow-up win prize counter 223d. 0 corresponds to 1). When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the number of prize-winning balls output by the main control device 110. By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the allocated winning ball counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Note that the various data stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is backed up for a predetermined period by a backup power supply when a power interruption occurs.

  The secondary allocation discharge ball counter 223e is a counter that indicates the number of game balls that have been discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 when the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 are discharged. When receiving the distributed discharge ball number command 223e output from the main control device 110, the secondary distribution discharge ball number counter 223e is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, when the distribution discharge number command is a command indicating 0, 255 is obtained when 1 is subtracted. In other words, the value “0 to 255” of the follow-up dispensed ball number counter 223e corresponds to the number of game balls discharged from the sort winning device 64 from 1 to 256, respectively (in the assigned discharge ball number counter 223e). A value of 0 corresponds to 1). When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and the number of allocated balls output by the main controller 110 in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113. By receiving the command, it is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the sorted discharge ball number counter 203f stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The pay-in-win counter 223f is a counter that indicates the number of game balls that have entered (remained in) the distribution prize device 64. In the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the pay-in-progress counter 223f is incremented by 1 when receiving the distributed winning ball number command output from the main control device 110. When a minute discharge ball number command is received, 1 is subtracted. Therefore, when there is a game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 64, the counter value indicates the number, and when there is no game ball in the distribution winning device 64, the counter value becomes zero. Yes. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is used to determine whether or not to change the background in the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is 4 or more (a value greater than 3), and if it is 4 or more, the process of changing the background is executed.

  The other memory area 223g is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 backs up to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 35. The processing of the MPU 201 is broadly divided into a startup process (FIG. 24) activated upon power-on, a main process (FIG. 27, S1200) executed after the startup process, and periodically (this embodiment). In FIG. 14, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23) activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 24) and the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and is cleared to 0 when the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (109 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and when the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special bonus type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, respectively). , 109, 99, 100, 99), each is cleared to 0. When the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the normal number The initial value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is read, and the initial value is set in the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a special symbol (third symbol) variation pattern or the like by the first symbol display device 37 for displaying a special symbol or the special symbol (third symbol) variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). ). Next, a distribution winning process associated with entering the distribution winning apparatus 64 is executed (S105), and an allocation discharging process accompanying discharging of the game balls from the distribution winning apparatus 64 is executed (S106). Next, a start winning process associated with winning a prize at the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is executed (S107). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, details of the distribution winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and details of the distribution discharge process (S106) will be described. The details of the start winning process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S107) is executed, a normal symbol variation process which is a variation process of the normal symbol with respect to the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol start port 67 is executed (S108), and then the normal symbol start port 67 is performed. A through gate process is executed for the game ball passing through (S109). Details of the normal symbol variation processing (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the through gate processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the firing control process (S110), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol fluctuation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the counter values obtained from the special symbols, and the first symbol display device 37 in the variation display mode determined by predetermined control. And the 3rd symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to enable variable display (dynamic display) at the same time, or to stop display in a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

  If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202, No), it is determined whether new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203). If it is determined that new data is not stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), a special symbol variation start process is executed (S204). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  The special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S204) will be described in detail later, but jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing are executed based on various data newly stored in the special symbol execution area 203a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), the special symbol is set to a fluctuation pattern (dynamic variation display mode) in which the special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic display). It is determined whether the variation time has elapsed (S205). If it is determined that the time is before the change time (S205: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S104: Yes), the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S206).

  Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a big hit (S207). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out (S207: No), this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since all of the special symbol changes are jackpots, the process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot may be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S207: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A or a jackpot B (S208). Here, the determination of the jackpot type is made by the special hit type table 202b shown in FIG. 9 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2. When it is determined that the jackpot is A, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203d (S209). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is B, 0 is set to the hour / medium counter 203d (S210). Various settings (for example, the number of rounds, etc.) relating to the start of the jackpot game are set (S211). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S204).

  In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), first, a sorting apparatus error notification control process is executed (S301). The distribution device error notification control process (S301) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17, but based on the current value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, The positions of the eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined, the positions are compared with the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, and if it is determined that they do not match, an error notification process is executed. It is a process to do.

  Data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S302). Based on the special symbol random number table 202a, the jackpot determination is executed for the acquired value of the special symbol random counter C1 (S303). It is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result executed in the process of S303 is a jackpot (S304). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S304: YES), the display mode (LED display mode) on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot is set (S305). A jackpot variation pattern for variably displaying the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is selected (determined) (S306).

Here, as the jackpot variation pattern, as the jackpot variation pattern selected based on winning at the first start port 71, a normal special variation pattern and a ceiling variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. A special ceiling change pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a switching special change pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner other than the ceiling change pattern. In addition, a short-time special variation pattern is set as a variation pattern selected based on winning of the second start opening 300.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the normal special variation pattern is that the left, middle, and right symbols (in this embodiment) when a game ball wins the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. , 1 to 9) are displayed in a loop (1 → 2 →... → 9 → 1) in ascending order at high speed. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is variably displayed at a low speed. When reaching the reach state, the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the characters “heaven reach!” Are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that a game ball has won is displayed at the first start port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won a big hit. In the present embodiment, if a game ball wins the first start opening 71, the game machine will always be a big hit, so the player recognizes that if the first start opening 71 wins, the player will win a big hit. . For this reason, the player is directly connected to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in this embodiment) that the game ball will win at the first start port 71 enters the distribution prize winning device 64. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls necessary to win the first starting port 71 have entered the allocation winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the characters “arrival in heaven !!”. Can be recognized as a big hit. Note that the variation time of the normal special variation pattern is set to 15 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the game ball is won at the first start port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started with the ceiling special variation pattern, the ceiling special variation pattern is displayed. The pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and a diagram with the closed door opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. The ceiling special variation pattern is set with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  The ceiling fluctuation pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance 71 after the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution prize-winning device 64 (the time set at the time of design). A variable time is set. Therefore, since the game ball will win the first start port 71 when the variation time ends after the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern is started, the replacement to the special symbol is performed smoothly, It can prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to identify whether the variation is a variation of a pseudo symbol or a variation of a special symbol, and even a pseudo symbol variation display can have an expectation for a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the switching special variation pattern is shown in FIG. 12 when a game ball is won at the first start opening 71 when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern. In this way, the pseudo-pattern that has been variably displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed momentarily. Thereafter, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in a “reach state” in which they are stopped and displayed, and the characters “arrival in heaven!” Are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol “777” is stopped and displayed to notify the player that the player has won a big hit. The switching special variation pattern is set with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a big win, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not used. Can be made. Further, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste and to focus on the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  The short-time special variation pattern is configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, and a configuration in which a predetermined symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is suddenly displayed in a state where all the symbols are aligned and is notified that a big hit has been made. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the short-time game state can be shortened, and the player can suppress getting bored with the game early because the jackpots are generated at short intervals. Further, the game store side can shorten the time during the short game when the game ball is not consumed, and can increase sales.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S303 is not correct (S304: No), a determination error notification command is set (S307). In this embodiment, since it is determined that the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a win, if it is determined that the game is out, the gaming machine has been tampered with illegally, Since it is considered that there is a malfunction, it is possible to notify the gaming machine side of the abnormality of the gaming machine by setting a judgment error notification command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the determination error notification command, error processing is executed so that a display indicating an error (for example, a character such as “determination error”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is generated (S308). A stop type command is set (S309). In the present embodiment, only the jackpot stop type command is set as the stop type command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the distribution device error notification control process (S301), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the sorting apparatus error notification control process (S301).

  Based on the position of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 and the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e, it is checked whether the data is the same as the data set in the sorting character position data 202i (S401). Here, the data set in the assigned character position data 202i is compared with the data corresponding to the three before and after the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e to check whether the data is the same. Run. As a result, when there is a game ball remaining in the distribution winning device 64 (flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), the remaining game ball is moved to the distribution rotating member 64a1. In this case as well, the position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 in the sorting accessory position data 202i corresponding to the three times before and after is determined from the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e. Thus, even in a normal game (a game in which fraud or the like is not performed), it is possible to suppress a problem that an error is notified.

  If it is determined that the collation results do not match (S401: No), an error notification command is set (S408). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, the display error notification command is set, and an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a character “position error” is displayed). On the other hand, when it is determined that the matching results match (S401: No), the process of S402 is executed. In addition, each process from S402 to S408 executes a collation process as to whether or not there is an abnormality in the positions of the second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8, similarly to the process of S401. Since the collating process is the same method as that of the first sorting rotating member 64a1, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300, the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S301) is executed. , It may be configured to execute only when the first start opening 71 is won. With this configuration, when the second start port 300 is won, the control process can be reduced and the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the process of collating each of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is executed. However, only the position of the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 is determined by the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Whether or not the value is the same as the data corresponding to the assigned character position data 202 i corresponding to 0 (in this embodiment, “0” indicating that the second storage portion 64 d 8 faces upward) is collated. It may be configured.

  With this configuration, after guiding the game ball to the first start port 71 (the eighth guide path 64z16), the second housing portion 64d8 is in a state of facing upward, By checking only the state, it can be easily determined whether or not the game ball has been normally guided to the first start port 71 via the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8. Further, even if there is a game ball that has subsequently won in the distribution winning device 64, it is necessary to enter a large number of game balls before the game ball reaches the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8. The position of the sorting rotation member 64a8 can be determined and determined. Therefore, it can be determined whether fraud has been performed correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the error notification process is executed when the collation does not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of invalidating the jackpot may be executed, or may be notified by voice or the like. In addition, a signal may be output to a hall computer or the like so that the player cannot identify it. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the game store side to recognize and respond earlier that the fraud has been notified. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected one by one. However, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined. It is configured to detect at one time, and the detected data (if normal, “10101010” indicating the position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when 256 game balls have entered. ) And position data corresponding to 0 (256) of the distribution initial position data 202h or the distribution accessory position data 202i. By comprising in this way, it can collate more easily whether a position is normal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the distribution winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interruption process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process (S105). In this distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105), the number of balls entered by the game balls into the distribution winning device 64 is counted, and the number of balls received is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Processing for generating a distributed winning ball number command is executed. Hereinafter, the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) will be described.

  In the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105), first, it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning apparatus 64 (S501). If it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S501: Yes), the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S502). 1 is added to the value of the acquired allocated winning ball number counter 203e and updated, and the updated value is stored in the allocated winning ball number counter 203e (S503). In addition, when the value of the acquired allocation winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, when 1 is added, the initial value is updated to 0. A distributed winning ball number command indicating the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is set (generated) (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the entrance 640 (S501: No), this process is terminated.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S505). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first start port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S505: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero. That is, the start of measurement is set for the time from when a game ball entering the first starting port 71 enters the entering port 640 to win the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  With this configuration, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 is accurately determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The number of balls can be recognized, and effects based on the number of game balls won in the distribution winning device 64 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the distribution discharge process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this sort discharge process (S106). The distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) is a process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 from one of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Executed. Hereinafter, the sorting and discharging process (FIG. 19, S106) will be described.

  In the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 (S601). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 (S601: Yes), the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is acquired (S602). 1 is added to the value of the obtained allocated discharge ball number counter 203f to update, and the updated value is stored in the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f (S603). Note that the value of the allocated distributed ball number counter 203f is 255, and when it is updated by adding 1, it is updated to 0. A distributed discharge ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is set (generated) (S604).

  In this way, by counting the number of game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64 and checking the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, the game illegally entered the distribution winning device 64 It is possible to monitor whether or not there is a ball (for example, a game ball is entered from any one of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  Next, the start winning process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S107). In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. Processing for storing data such as various counter values acquired in the symbol execution area is executed. In addition, when a game ball wins at the first start port 71, the flow-down time after winning the game ball distribution winning device 64 at the first start port 71 is a set value (in the present embodiment). 5 seconds to 7 seconds), and if it is outside the set value, error processing is executed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start opening 71 (start winning prize) (S701). Here, a winning at the first start port 71 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start port 71 (start winning has been received) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the distribution winning flag 203h is set to on (S702). When it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is off (S702: No), a winning / winning error notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that there has been an abnormal winning at the first start port 71. A command is set (generated) (S703). Here, the distribution winning flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, so Even if it is determined that a game ball has won the first starting port 71, if the distribution winning flag 203h is off, there is a possibility that the first starting port 71 has been illegally won. Perform error handling. As a result, even if the sensor or the like of the first starting port 71 is illegally turned on by electromagnetic waves or the like from the outside of the gaming machine, the illegality can be detected, and illegal jackpot acquisition can be prevented. .

  The distribution winning flag 203h is set off (S704). It is determined whether or not the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is within a set value (5 seconds to 7 seconds in the present embodiment) (S705). In the present embodiment, the time required from winning through the first entrance 71 after passing through the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 is designed to be 6 seconds. Therefore, when a fraudulent or the like that illegally reaches the first starting port 71 by wrapping a piano wire or the like around the game ball by setting the first and second seconds as a set value and 5 seconds to 7 seconds as a set value is performed. Can detect fraud when the time until the first start port 71 is reached is outside the set value.

  When it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is outside the set value (S705: No), the process of S703 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is within the set value (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S706). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S706: Yes), the process of S703 is executed. Here, when a game ball is won at the first start port 71 and the special symbol is changed, the change time of 10 seconds of the normal special symbol change pattern is the longest change pattern. Since it is usually not possible to win the first start port 71 next after the 10 seconds have elapsed, if it is determined that the special symbol has been won at the first start port 71 during a change, By setting a winning error command, the game store can recognize at an early stage that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine. Therefore, even if the first start opening 71 is continuously won illegally, the gaming store side recognizes the fraud at an early stage, so that damage caused by the fraud can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S706: No), the values of the random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 per special symbol are acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S707). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start opening 71 (S701: No), the process of S708 is executed.

  It is determined whether the game ball has won the second start opening 300 (S708). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 300 (S708: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has won the second start opening 300 (S708: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S709). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S709), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S709: No), each value of the random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 per special symbol is acquired to execute the special symbol. It is stored in the area 203a (S710).

  In this way, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 71, whether or not the win is a regular win, the pitching history to the sorting prize winning device 64 (the sorting prize flag 203h is on). Or not), the flow time of the winning game ball (the value of the distribution winning timer 203g), and whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. By executing the error process for setting the winning error command without acquiring the data, it is possible to prevent an illegal jackpot from being generated.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult for the game balls to win the first start port 71 and the second start port 300 at the same time. Further, if a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300 at the same time, the first start port 71 is given priority. The game ball won in the second starting port 300 is processed as an invalid ball as the special symbol is changing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the normal symbol variation process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S108). The normal symbol variation process (S108) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol). (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) hit includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays the hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory. . If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S802: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed ( S803). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S822, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83. Regardless of the short-time gaming state and the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state), the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set with a variation time of 3 seconds for both the winning variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S803 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S803, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S803: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S804). . In the process of S804, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S817, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol in a stopped display (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S821, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S804, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S817 and S821. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S805). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S805: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set (806). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is out of place (S805: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S808). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S808: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S808: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S809).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S810). In the processing of S810, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S811).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle counter 203d is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S812). When it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203d is 0 (that is, not in time-shortage) (S812: No), the random number table 202c per normal symbol for non-time-saving (normal gaming state) (FIG. 8 (c) ) Is determined based on the winning determination value (S1013), whereas if it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time is short-time) (S812: Yes). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S814: Yes), the processing of S813 is executed, whereas the special symbol jackpot is determined. If it is determined that the game is not in progress (S814: No), the success / failure determination is made based on the winning determination value in the random symbol table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) for the normal symbol for time reduction (time reduction gaming state). Result is obtained (S815).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S816). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S816: Yes), a display mode of “◯” which is a display mode at the time of winning is set (S817). The opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S820). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out of place) (S816: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set. (S819). Then, the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S822).

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S109). This through gate passing process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol.

  In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 22, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is If it is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter The value (M) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol acquired in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (ordinary symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S905). In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol reservation 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S910), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 24), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). (S1005: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014).

  The distribution position initialization process is executed (S1015). The distribution position initialization process (S1015) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, but the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are predetermined. This is a process for setting an initial value. After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1011). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (FIG. 27, S1200) described later.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is in an initialized state until the distribution winning ball number command or the like is output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on. Not limited to this, the information backed up by the main control device 110 (for example, the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e) in the processing of S1010 of the start-up processing (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Etc.) may be output as a backup command so that the audio lamp control device 113 backs up the MPU 221. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can also back up data and the like in a state immediately before the power is turned off.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the distribution position initialization process (S1015), which is one process in the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. 25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the distribution position initialization process (S1015).

  In the sorting position initialization process (FIGS. 25 and 26, S1015), first, the position of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is acquired from the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 (S1101). Here, the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and not only the first distribution rotation member 64a1 but also the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2. Each rotation angle can be detected for .about.64a8. The rotation angle is set to be a positive value when the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward, and a negative value when the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward. If the acquired value is a positive value, “1” is acquired, and if it is a negative value, “0” is acquired.

  The initial position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 stored in the sorting initial position data 202h (in the present embodiment, the first storage portion 64c1 indicates that the value is acquired in the processing of S1101) Whether it is the same as the value of “1”) is determined (S1102). If it is determined that the acquired value is the same as the initial position data (S1102: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value is different from the initial position data (S1102: No), the initial position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 stored in the sorting initial position data 202h (this embodiment) Then, according to “10101010”), the sorting position adjusting motor 263 is set (S1103). In the present embodiment, the sorting position adjusting motor 263 is set so that the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is rotated rightward to a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, a position of plus 90 degrees).

  In the processing of S1104 to S1124, the initial positions of the second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are set in the same manner as the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The initial position of the second sorting rotation member 64a2 is a minus 90 degree position where the second storage portion 64d2 faces upward, and the initial position of the third sorting rotation member 64a3 is the first storage portion 64c3. Is the position of plus 90 degrees, which is the position facing upward, the initial position of the fourth sorting rotation member 64a4 is the position of minus 90 degrees, the position where the second storage portion 64d4 faces upward, and the fifth sorting rotation The initial position of the member 64a5 is a position of plus 90 degrees where the first storage portion 64c5 faces upward, and the initial position of the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 is a position where the second storage portion 64d6 faces upward. The position of minus 90 degrees, the initial position of the seventh sorting rotation member 64a7 is the position of plus 90 degrees where the first storage portion 64c7 faces upward, and the initial position of the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 is Second housing part 64d There are respectively set to the position of minus 90 degrees is a position facing upwards. The setting method is the same as that of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, and therefore will be omitted.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated), the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are set to predetermined initial positions, respectively. As a result, the game store side changes the state of the distribution winning device 64 to the state where the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e in which no game ball is included is 0 (the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8). Is set to the state where the game ball is guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15), the RAM 203 is operated to initialize the RAM 203 by operating the RAM erase switch 122. The allocation prize winning device 64 can also be automatically set to the initial state. Therefore, when the game store is opened, a plurality of gaming machines can be easily set to the same state (the value of the same distributed winning ball counter 203e).

  Further, in this embodiment, the initial position of the distribution winning device 64 is set to a state in which the winning ball counter 203e in which no game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64 is 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the number counter 203e is set to 255 (position where the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game balls to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16), You may comprise so that it may be set to the state which can be made to win the starting port 71 and can give a big hit. By configuring in this way, the game store side can prepare a gaming machine that is immediately awarded a jackpot, and can attract a large number of customers who come to the store in search of the gaming machine set in that way at the time of opening the store It is possible to increase the number of customers who visit the store from the opening. In addition, you may comprise so that the game store side can set suitably the state of the distribution prize-winning apparatus 64 with a switch etc. FIG.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which confirms a position with respect to each of the 1st-8th distribution rotating member 64a1-64a8, and performs the process set to an initial value, it is not restricted to this, All The sorting rotation member may be forcibly set to an initial value. As described above, the initial setting process can be simplified by collectively performing the initial setting process regardless of the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the process when the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). In the main process (S1200), roughly divided, a counter update process, a power-off process, and an abnormal winning monitoring process for the distribution winning device 64 are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 27, S1200), first, output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  The winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1202, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, execution of various effects corresponding to the big win, and a specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a A jackpot control process for opening or closing the door is performed (S1203), and an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the blades 300a, 300b of the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 300 is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1204), when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as a normal symbol, or when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a normal jackpot, the opening time of the electric accessory When the number of times of opening is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, the display control process of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1205). Display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1206). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the value. Then, the variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are released for a predetermined time.

  Next, a distribution error process is executed (S1207). The distribution error process (S1207) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28, but the difference between the game balls won and discharged in the distribution winning device 64 is an abnormal set value (in this embodiment, 10 or more) or when the 256th game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, the flow time of the game ball is equal to or more than the average number of seconds to reach the first start port 71 (this implementation) In the embodiment, a process for determining whether an abnormality has occurred is executed by determining whether or not 7 seconds or more have elapsed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1209: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated (S1210).

  Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 99 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the random counter per special symbol). The initial value of C1, the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol) can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S1208 is executed at the timing when the series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the process of S1210 performed within the remaining time. ing. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial setting process (FIG. 24, S1001) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the distribution error process (S1207) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the distribution error process (S1207).

  In the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), first, the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is subtracted from the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e to obtain an abnormal set value or more (in this embodiment, 10 or more). ) Is determined (S1301). The subtraction here is an operation for obtaining the number of difference balls between the game balls that have entered and the game balls that have been discharged. For example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 3, If the value of the discharged ball number counter 203f is 254, the subtraction result is calculated as 5. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls being entered in the allocation prize winning device 64 is 9 if it is a design value, and if there are more, the ball is entered without going through the entrance 640 (for example, the first An injustice can be considered in which a game ball enters from any one of the eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8.

  When it is determined that the difference between the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the distributed discharged ball counter 203f is equal to or greater than the abnormal setting value (S1301: Yes), an error notification command is set (generated) (S1302). . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, it generates a display command for displaying a display mode (for example, a character such as “abnormal character abnormal winning error”) indicating an abnormality on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball counter 203f is less than the abnormal setting value (S1301: No), the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON. Is determined (S1303). If it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to OFF (S1303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S1303: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is acquired. 1 is added to the value of the acquired allocation prize timer 203g (S1305).

  It is determined whether or not the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is a value indicating the arrival average number of seconds or more (7 seconds or more in the transliteration form) (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is equal to or greater than the average arrival seconds (S1306: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1307). Note that the processing in S1307 is the same as that in S1302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution prize timer 203g is less than the average arrival seconds (S1306: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207) is executed at intervals of 4 ms, and it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the distribution winning device 64. As soon as it is determined that game balls exceeding the design value have entered the distribution prize device 64 (there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged), error processing can be executed. Therefore, fraud and abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 can be detected early. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be further reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that the number of game balls (256 in this embodiment) that will be awarded to the first starting port 71 has entered the distribution winning device 64, the game Since the time until the ball reaches the first start port 71 is monitored, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is always compared with the case where the flow time of the game ball that has entered is monitored. Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number for determining that the difference between the number of balls entered into the distribution prize winning device 64 and the number of discharged balls is abnormal is set to a preset value. You may make it the structure which provides a setting switch etc. By configuring in this way, it can be adjusted and set in accordance with a change in the rate at which game balls enter the distribution prize device 64 (frequency of entering) by adjusting the game nails or the like. Therefore, it is possible to monitor the abnormality with the abnormality setting value that more closely matches the state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to accurately detect the abnormality.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1600) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process (FIG. 29) is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-on process of S1619 (see FIG. 30) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 30, S1616), it executes the power-off process of S1619. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1619 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1619 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1619, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S169, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1619 is executed (see S1618 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1619 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1619 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1509), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1508 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1508 is performed via the processes of S1504 to S1506. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1509 is that if the process from S1504 to S1506 is reached via the process in S1506, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process (S1600). When the main process (S1600) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1600) was started or since the last time the process of S1601 was executed ( S1601) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1610. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. In steps S1602 to S1610, the process is related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1611 and the command determination process of S1614 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, the setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process, and by executing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, It is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1609 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S1606), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1611. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1610), a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1611, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1611), a pseudo fluctuation process is executed (S1612). The pseudo variation process (S1612) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the pseudo variation pattern (pseudo dynamic display) of the pseudo symbol to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81. A mode) is determined, and a process of generating a pseudo variation pattern for display indicating the determined variation pattern is executed.

  After the pseudo variation process (S1612), the background selection process is executed (S1613). The background selection process (S1613) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied. In the case of changing, processing for determining the type of background image to be changed is executed.

  A command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is executed (S1614). Details of the command determination processing (S1614) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1614 is completed, a process of updating each counter that adds 1 to the counter value such as the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1615). It is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1618), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1619). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1620), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The memory of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1617), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1617: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process (S1600) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1617: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1600) is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, for convenience of description, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To do. Details of the command determination process (S1614) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1701). Here, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying a special symbol. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1702). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1703). The type of variation pattern extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the type of variation pattern of the special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) described later. This is used when setting a special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the special symbol variation display effect and the type of variation pattern of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1704: Yes), when the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. (S1705). The stop type (either jackpot A or jackpot B) is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is determined whether a distributed winning ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). If it is determined that the allocated winning ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the winning ball number indicated by the received distributed winning ball number command is extracted, and the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is subtracted. It is stored (stored) in the payout winning ball number counter 223d (S1708). Here, when the value of the distributed winning ball counter 223d is 0, 1 is subtracted to 255. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is acquired, and the value is updated by adding 1, and stored in the pay-in-win counter 223f (S1709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1707: No), it is determined whether the distribution discharge ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (No). S1710). When it is determined that the distributed discharge ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1710: Yes), the discharged ball number is extracted from the received distributed discharge ball number command, and the value obtained by subtracting 1 is subtracted. This is stored in the sorted discharge ball number counter 223e (S1711). Here, in the case where the distributed discharge ball number command is a command indicating 0, 1 is subtracted to 255. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is acquired, and the updated value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is stored in the pay-in-win counter 223f (S1712).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distributed discharge ball number command has not been received (S1710: No), it is determined whether an error notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1713). When it is determined that an error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713: Yes), a display error notification command is set (generated) (S1714). This error notification command is a command for displaying the error content on the third symbol display device 81 in characters based on the type of the error notification command output by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an error notification command has not been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1715). If it is determined that an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1715: Yes), an ending setting process is executed (S1717). The ending setting process (S1717) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32, but is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of jackpot game executed (either jackpot A or jackpot B). A process for setting the ending screen to be executed is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1716: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S1716).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ending setting process (S1719), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S1719).

  In the ending setting process (FIG. 32, S1719), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot being executed was a jackpot A (shift to the short-time gaming state after 16R jackpot) (S1801). When it is determined that the big hit being executed is the big hit A (S1801: Yes), the time-shortening effect display (FIG. 13a) is set as the display mode (ending image) of the ending effect (S1802). On the other hand, when it is determined that the big jackpot being executed is the big jackpot B (the transition to the normal gaming state after 16R jackpot) (S1801: No), as a display mode of the ending effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The normal effect display (FIG. 13B) is set (S1803). A display ending command indicating the set ending effect is set (generated).

  In the short time effect display, as shown in FIG. 13A, the characters “Magic world mode entry” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the short-time gaming state is informed by the name of the magic world mode, and the player is informed that the short-time gaming state is in effect. In the normal effect display, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the characters “entering the celestial challenge mode” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state) is notified by the name of heaven challenge mode. The player recognizes that the celestial challenge mode shifts to a game in which the sorting prize-winning device 64 enters the game until the game ball is awarded to the first start port 71 (in the game production, the game reaches the heaven).

  In the present embodiment, the player first determines whether the executed jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B based on the display mode of the ending. Thereby, the game can be performed with an expectation that the jackpot being executed is not the jackpot A until just before the jackpot ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variable display setting process (S1611) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1611).

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223b is off (S1901: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the processing of S1909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off (S1902).

  In the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol is being variably displayed (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S1903: No), the variation in the variable display effect of the special symbol extracted from the variation pattern command in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614). The pattern is acquired from the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 (S1904).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 that the pseudo symbol is variably displayed (S1903: Yes), the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is: Whether it is a ceiling fluctuation pattern or not is discriminated (S1905). When it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a ceiling variation pattern (S1905: Yes), a special ceiling variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1906). On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not the ceiling variation pattern (S1905: No), a switching special variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1907). A display variation pattern command corresponding to the obtained variation pattern is set (generated) (S1908).

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON (S1909). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1909: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off (S1910).

  In the process of S1706 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set (S1911). A display stop type command corresponding to the set stop type is set (S1912).

  As described above, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, when the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed, the variation pattern command indicates that the variation pattern command indicates. Thus, the ceiling special variation pattern or the switching special variation pattern is selected. Thereby, the display mode of the special symbol can be matched with the display mode connected to the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it can be configured to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the display is a variation display with a pseudo symbol or a variation display with a special symbol. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the pseudo fluctuation process (S1612), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this pseudo variation process (S1612). The pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) is a process for determining a pseudo-pattern variation pattern to be variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) will be described below.

  In the pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), first, it is determined whether the special symbol is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2001). If it is determined that the special symbol is being variably displayed (S2001: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2001: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2002). If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2002: No), it is determined in the process of S1707 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) that a distributed winning ball number command has been received. Is determined (S2003). When it is determined that the distributed winning ball number command has been received (S2003: Yes), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2004). Based on the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d acquired in S2004, a pseudo variation pattern is selected (determined) from the pseudo variation table 222e (see FIG. 10A). (S2005). A pseudo variation pattern command corresponding to the selected pseudo variation pattern is set (generated) (S2006). On the other hand, if it is determined that the distributed winning ball number command has not been received (S2003: No), this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the special symbol and the pseudo symbol are not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the distribution winning ball number command is received (that is, a game is entered at the entrance 640 of the allocation winning device 64). When a sphere enters), a pseudo-variable pseudo-variation pattern is selected, and the start of pseudo-variable display is set. Therefore, the player feels as if the lottery game has started because the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, and the pseudo-graphic variation display is a special symbol variation display. It feels like it is, and with the expectation of a jackpot, you can see the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, even for a player who is skilled in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pseudo-pattern variation pattern is selected based on the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d (the ratio of the type of pseudo-variation pattern selected (selected). Therefore, the number of game balls won in the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted based on the type of the pseudo variation pattern selected and the frequency thereof. Therefore, even if the player knows that the variation is a pseudo symbol, he / she can obtain more important information related to the jackpot than the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, so he / she is more interested in the pseudo symbol variation display. You can play games.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the background selection process (S1613) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background selection process (S1613). The background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) determines whether or not to change the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and executes the process of determining the background image to be changed. Hereinafter, background selection processing (FIG. 35, S1613) will be described.

  In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613), first, the number of game balls in which the value of the winning prize counter 223f is larger than 3, that is, the number of game balls that have entered (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64 It is determined whether or not there are four or more (S2101). If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 is four or more (S2101: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2102). A background pattern is selected from the background selection table 222f (see FIG. 10B) based on the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d acquired in the processing of S2102 (S2103). . A display background command corresponding to the selected background pattern is set (generated) (S2104). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is 3 or less (S2101: No), this process ends.

  Thus, since the background image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is changed when the number of game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 is four or more, it is random. The background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed at an appropriate timing. The background image to be selected is the ratio of the types of background images selected by the number of game balls that have entered the allocation prize winning device 64 (the value of the secondary allocation prize winning ball counter 223d) (the selected background image). Frequency) is set to be changed, so that the background image to be selected is a hint for the player to predict the number of balls entered by the sorting and winning device 64. Can interest you.

  In addition, the background image selected when the 256th game ball to be won at the first starting port 71 enters the allocation prize winning device 64 is limited to the precursor C background (FIG. 13C). Therefore, when the precursor C background is selected, the first start port 71 can be expected to win. Therefore, the player can be interested in the background image in addition to the jackpot, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In this way, a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) of game balls wins the distribution winning device 64, so that the player is always given a big hit, so that the big hit for a long time. It is possible to prevent problems that are not given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessively large.

  Further, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the player may get bored with the game before the predetermined number wins the distribution winning device 64, but the pseudo symbol configured in the same display manner as the special symbol. By starting the change display at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution prize device 64, the player can enjoy the change display of the pseudo design as if the change of the special symbol is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, when another person plays a game or when a game is started at the time of opening a store, it is impossible to determine how many game balls have entered the allocation prize winning device 64. The frequency (ratio) of the types of pseudo-variation patterns selected based on the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning device 64 (value of the follower prize winning ball counter 223d) is set to be changed. Therefore, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 can be predicted from the type of the pseudo variation pattern to be selected. Therefore, even when the special symbol is not variably displayed, it is possible to prevent the game from being bored by the variably displayed pseudo symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state), the jackpot does not occur until a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) enters the sorting prize winning device 64. When the game state is entered, it is possible to enter the second starting port 300, and since the jackpot is given to the player at an early stage, the speed feeling until the big hit between the normal game state and the short-time game state is obtained. By making the difference greatly, it is possible to make the player have a stronger desire to shift to the short-time gaming state and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with game types that are greatly different between the normal game state and the short-time game state.

  In addition, although it has been a configuration that always wins by winning the first starting port 71, when winning the first starting port 71, after entering the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 By determining whether the arrival time until winning the first start port 71 is appropriate or whether the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are appropriate, a big hit due to fraud It can suppress giving. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is counted, thereby counting the number of entrances (the number of entrances to the ceiling) necessary to win the first start port 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may naturally be configured to make a determination at each position of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the process of counting the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640, so the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, after the distribution rotating member guides the game ball, it returns to the position before guidance (for example, after receiving the game ball and guiding the game ball with the first housing portion facing upward) Even if the momentum is too strong or the first storage part turns upward again due to vibrations to the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the count value of the entrance 640 and the distribution rotating member The problem that the state (position) is deviated can be suppressed, and the number of entering balls required up to the first start port 71 can be determined based on the current position of the sorting and rotating member.

  Further, the count value of the entrance 640 and the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are collated at regular intervals and the count value is compared with the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a1. You may comprise so that it may correct | amend based on the position of 64a8. In such a case, when the collation result is corrected differently for a predetermined number of times or more, an error notification is given and the amusement shop side can confirm whether fraud has been performed or whether it is a malfunction due to a failure. You may comprise as follows. By comprising in this way, the count value of the entrance 640 and the state of the 1st-8th distribution rotation member 64a1-64a8 can be match | combined correctly, and control, such as an exact presentation, can be performed. .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since it comprised with the eight distribution rotation members of the 1st-8th distribution rotation members 64a1-64a8, each position can be shown with 1 bit data, and a total of 8 bits. Since it can be composed of data, data can be easily transmitted and received.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 66, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the number of balls that will enter the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, and the game ball wins the first starting port 71. In this case, the case where the game ball is fired toward the specific winning port 65a in the right region of the game area where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 64 is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the distribution winning device 64, and when a big hit is reached, a game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 even during the big hit. It was set as the structure to do. Depending on the jackpot type, after the jackpot game, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set at predetermined positions by lottery, so that the winning prize device 64 after the jackpot game is set. The number of balls required before winning the first starting port 71 is variably set. Also, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with two ordinary electric accessories, and when each of them is opened, the game ball is guided to a predetermined distribution rotating member, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. To do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the second symbol display device 83 is provided with a display unit for displaying the first normal symbol success / failure determination result side by side with “O” and “X”. Below that, a display unit for displaying the determination result of the second normal symbol is arranged side by side with “o” and “x”. In addition, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is a ball (holding ball) of which the variation display is not executed among the game balls won in the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2. The display part which shows the number of reservation balls which is a number by a lighting state is set.

  The variable winning device 65 provided at the lower right side of the game area is provided at the upper left of the distribution winning device 64 at the center of the game area. A general winning opening 63 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. Further, on the right side surface of the distribution winning device 64, a first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric combination which is an ordinary electric combination and a second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric combination are respectively provided.

  In a normal gaming state (a gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state), the player turns the operation handle 51 to the maximum to the right to fire the game ball with the maximum firing force, thereby causing the right gaming area ( The game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80). Then, the game ball is launched so that the game ball enters the first normal symbol start port 67s1, the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and the entrance port 640. On the other hand, when the big hit game state is reached, the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area (left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39, during the jackpot game, the variable prize winning device 65 rotates the opening / closing plate downward to the front side for a predetermined period, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Upon receipt, it is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. When the opening / closing plate is rotated downward, the rotation is restricted slightly on the side of the specific winning opening 65a (about 85 to 88 degrees) than 90 degrees, and the opening / closing plate is inclined in the direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the shape of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is formed with a tapered surface 65s inclined toward the right end, and the game ball falling on the tapered surface is guided to the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. It is comprised so that.

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64 more easily than the normal game state (a game state other than the jackpot game). Therefore, when the 256th game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 and wins the first start port 71 and wins a big hit, the game ball is put into the distribution winning device 64 while playing the big hit game. By entering the ball, after the big hit game, the game ball is in a state of winning the distribution winning device 64, and the number of remaining balls up to the 256th can be reduced. Therefore, the next winning can be given to the player at an early stage.

  In addition, it is possible to adjust the game ball so that it does not easily fall on the tapered surface 65s (the game ball flows down near the left side of the variable winning device 65) by firing the game ball weakly. If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning device 64 has approached 256, which will win the first start port 71, the launch force of the game ball is adjusted to weaken by adjusting the operation handle 51, 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 during the big hit, and wins during the big hit game at the first start opening 71, so that the winning to the first start opening 71 becomes an invalid ball. It becomes the structure which can prevent becoming. Accordingly, the profits obtained by the player vary depending on the player's judgment and the game method, so that the player can concentrate and play the game. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game.

  In addition, it is possible to set the game ball launch so that it cannot be weakly adjusted by continuously performing the maximum number of times (for example, 5 consecutive times), and deliberately let the first start port 71 win a prize during the big hit. You may comprise. By doing in this way, an upper limit can be set to the number of consecutive jackpots, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with a first blade 64s1 obliquely above the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 on the right side surface, and secondly above the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Each blade 64s2 is provided. Each of the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees to the outside of the sorting and winning device 64 around the lower end portion by a solenoid. The first blade 64s1 normally stands upright and is configured to close the first normal entrance 640s1 through which the game ball formed on the right side surface of the sorting and winning device 64 can pass. When it comes to the symbol, the game ball is turned to the right by about 45 degrees to guide the game ball to the first normal entrance. The second blade 64s2 is configured in the same manner as the first blade 64s1. Each of the first normal entrance 640s1 and the second normal entrance 640s2 is configured by a gate type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 38, a game in which the first blade 64s1 rotates and enters the first normal entrance 640s1 inside the distribution winning device 64. A first normal guiding path 64m1 for guiding the sphere to the sixth sorting rotating member 64a6 is provided. The first normal guiding path 64m1 is configured by a wall portion protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and forms a guiding path on which the game ball can roll. Further, a fifth facing member 64t5 is provided above the first ordinary guiding path 64m1 so as to form a width that allows a game ball to pass between the first ordinary guiding path 64m1. Even if the momentum of the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 is strong, it collides with the fifth facing member 64t5, and further, the game ball flows down in the direction of the sixth outlet 650a6 without being completely guided by the fifth facing member 64t5. Even so, it is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 by the first normal guiding path 64m1 (a game ball is prevented from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down the fifth guide path 64z10 from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6 without passing through the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6. Therefore, it can suppress that it becomes disadvantageous to a player. Also, the game ball that has entered the second normal entrance 640s2 is provided with a second normal guide path 64m2 in the same manner as the game ball that has entered the first normal entrance 640s1. The second ordinary guiding path 64m2 is configured similarly to the first ordinary guiding path 64m1.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game area, a first normal symbol start port 67s1 configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough and a second normal symbol start port 67s2 are provided directly below the first normal symbol start port 67s1. Two nails are disposed above the first normal symbol start port 67s1, and the amount of game balls entering the first normal symbol start port 67s1 by adjusting the inclination of the nail ( (Ease of entering the ball) can be adjusted. Also, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 have the same shape and are arranged in series in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has entered the first normal symbol start port 67s1 is the first one. 2 It is easy to enter the normal symbol start port 67s2.

  In addition, the second symbol display device 83 displays the first normal symbol display portion 83a on which the first normal symbol based on the start winning at the first normal symbol start port 67s1 is variably displayed and the second normal symbol start port 67s2. A second normal symbol display portion 83b on which the second normal symbol based on the start winning is displayed is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, but not limited thereto, they may be arranged in parallel in the left and right, The variable display device unit 80 may be sandwiched between the left and right sides of the game area, or may be appropriately disposed at a desired position.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, as shown in FIG. 42A, the random symbol table 202c per ordinary symbol is deleted for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the random table per first ordinary symbol is stored. 202c1, a random number table 202c2 per second normal symbol, a status selection table 202k, and a random number setting table 202m are respectively added.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). The hit random number counter C4 is a data table in which random number values of the random number counter C4 for normal symbols determined to be hit are stored. In the present embodiment, a value in the range of “5 to 7” is set as a random number value in the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 as a random number value determined to be a winning. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised with the pachinko machine 10 in which time-saving game is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the second normal symbol random number table 202c2 is the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 in the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state). The hit random number counter C4 is a data table in which random number values of the random number counter C4 for normal symbols determined to be hit are stored. In the present embodiment, a value of “3” is set as the random number value in the second normal symbol random number table 202c2 as the random number value determined to be winning. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised with the pachinko machine 10 in which time-saving game is not set.

  In the special hit type table 202b, instead of the big hit A and big hit B, the big hits C to F are set corresponding to the values of the special hit type counter C2 in the special hit type table 202b in the first embodiment. Yes. The jackpot C is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 0 to 19. The jackpot C is a jackpot game consisting of five rounds in the jackpot game. After the big hit, a random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot D is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 20 to 35. The jackpot D is a jackpot game consisting of five rounds in the jackpot game. After the big hit, the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) for setting the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 by lottery is not executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot E is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 36 to 39. In the jackpot game, a jackpot game composed of 16R rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is not executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot F is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 40 to 99. In the jackpot game, a jackpot game consisting of 16 rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set by lottery. Setting processing (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the status selection table 202k is a data table in which the values of the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the value of a status selection counter 203m described later are assigned to the statuses A to E. . In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the value of the random counter 203q described later is a status change value (any one of 0 to 39 in this embodiment) The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k based on the values of the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the status selection counter 203m.

  In the random number setting table 202m, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64 set to the initial state is 0, 100, 200, and 255. It is the data table in which the value of the random counter 203p is each set with respect to each positional information with respect to each number of entering balls of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Specifically, if the value of the random counter 203p is in the range of 0 to 24, the first to eighth swings when the number of balls entered into the sorting prize winning device 64 is 0 (or 256). The position information “10101010” of each of the minute rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is selected. Similarly, if the value is in the range of 25 to 29, the position information “10001100” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 100 is selected. If the value is in the range of 30 to 89, the position information “10111001” of each of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 200 is selected. If the value is in the range of 90 to 99, the position information “01010101” of each of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 255 is selected.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203c, and the hour / medium counter 203d are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol is deleted. Reserved ball storage area 203b1, second normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2, first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1, second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2, first normal power flag 203j1, second normal power flag 203j2, A first general power timer 203k1, a second general power timer 203k2, a status selection counter 203m, a status storage area 203n, a random counter 203p, a distribution position storage area 203q, and a distribution maintenance flag 203r are added.

  The first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) upon detection of a start winning at the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. It is. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (start winning prize) to the first normal symbol start port 67s1 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49), the random number per normal symbol is read from the counter buffer. The value of the counter C4 is acquired and stored in the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1. The first normal symbol flag provided in the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is set to ON and stored (stored). The first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 has four reserved areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the first ordinary symbol flag) can be stored (held) up to four times. Have. In the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1, the data in the reserved ball is stored in the order in which the data of the reserved balls are consumed in the order of passing through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (start winning prize). It is stored in order from the area (holding area corresponding to the number of balls held).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes the first normal operation described above in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize (value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data corresponding to one starting prize is used as the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. Shifts to the first normal symbol holding ball execution area provided at. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) upon detection of a start winning at the second ordinary symbol start port 67s2. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 49) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds ( The number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the fact that it is referred to as “start prize” hereinafter. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 24, S1014). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S839 in FIG. 54).

  The second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts up to four times with respect to the number of reserved balls that the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start opening 67s2, and a first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1. Since it is the same structure, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The first normal power flag 203j1 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance process performed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 56, S116), the game ball is set to ON based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1. On the other hand, the value of the first general electric timer 203k1 for measuring the time after the game ball has passed through a first normal entrance 640s1 described later is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (5 seconds in this embodiment). When it is determined that it has elapsed, it is set to off. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the first general power flag 203j1 is set to off.

  The second power transmission flag 203j2 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in respect to the second normal entrance 640s2, the on / off setting is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power flag 203j1. The second general power flag 203j2 is set to OFF when the second general power timer 203k2 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (2s in the present embodiment).

  The first general electric timer 203k1 is a timer for measuring the flow time after the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1, it is set to 0. While the first ordinary power flag 203j1 indicating that a game ball has passed through the one ordinary entrance 640s1 is set to ON, 1 is added each time the ordinary entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) is executed. Has been updated. The first public power timer 203k1 is incremented by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49). The second general electric timer 203k2 is a timer that measures the flow down time after the game ball passes through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in respect to the second normal entrance 640s2, processing such as updating is executed in the same manner as the first general power timer 203k1. In the present embodiment, the first general power timer 203k1 or the second general power timer 203k2 is reset to 0 when the first general power flag 203j1 or the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON, respectively. Although the configuration is not limited thereto, the configuration may be reset to 0 when the first general power flag 203j1 or the second general power flag 203j2 is set to OFF.

  The status selection counter 203m is a counter for selecting a status from the status selection table 202k shown in FIG. The status selection counter 203m is composed of counter values that are updated in the range of “0 to 198”. The status selection counter 203m is incremented and updated by 1 in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, when 1 is added to the upper limit value 198, it is updated to 0 which is an initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The random counter 203p selects the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 set after the big hit C and the big hit F, which will be described later, from the random number table shown in FIG. 45 (b). It is a counter for. The random counter 203p is configured with a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 99”. The random counter 203p is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1210 of the main process (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, when 1 is added to 99 which is an upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is an initial value. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, 0 which is an initial value is set.

  In the distribution position storage area 203q, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored in a state where there is no game ball flowing down inside the distribution winning device 64. It is a storage area. In the position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are changed in a state where the game balls are not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. Used to monitor whether fraud is occurring. Specifically, in the allocation error process 2 (FIG. 62, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the difference between the allocated winning ball number counter 203e and the allocated discharged ball number counter 203f is 0 (that is, If it is determined that there is no game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 at that time is stored. Is done.

  At this time, each position information stored in the sorting position storage area 203q is added to the plus rotation angle (positions where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 are directed vertically upward by the sorting position check sensor 262). “1” is stored when the rotation angle is set to the negative rotation angle, and “0” is stored when the rotation angle is negative. If 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64 and won the first starting port 71, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is the first distribution. The information is stored as “10101010” sequentially from the position information of the rotating member 64a1.

  The distribution maintaining flag 203r is a flag indicating that a game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. The distribution maintaining flag 203r indicates a difference in value between the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball number counter 203f in the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 59, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When it is determined that the game ball is 0 (that is, a state in which the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), it is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined in the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 that the game ball has entered the entrance slot 640 in the allocation winning apparatus 64, it is turned off. Is set. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to off.

  In the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the contents of the pseudo variation table 222a and the background selection table 222b are changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pseudo variation table 222a in the first embodiment, a pseudo variation pattern is set for the value of the follow-up divided winning ball counter 223d, whereas in the pseudo variation table 222a in the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in 44 (b), the fact that a pseudo variation pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 is changed.

  In the background selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the background pattern is set for the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d, whereas in the background selection table 222b in the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in a), the point that the background pattern is set for the status in the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 is changed.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d, the follow-up dispensed ball count counter 223e, and the pay-in prize counter 223f are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. A secondary status storage area 223h, a normal variation flag 223i, and a background change counter 223j are added.

  The sub status storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the status type (status information) indicated by the received status command based on the reception of the status command output from the main control device 110.

  The normal variation flag 223i is a flag indicating that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 has been received. Set to ON when it is determined in command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed by the MPU 221 to the sound lamp control device 113 that a hit variation pattern command of a normal symbol output from the main control device 110 has been received. Is done. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, when the interrupt normal pseudo fluctuation pattern or the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2024 or S2025), it is set to OFF. Is done. When the RAM 223 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The background change counter 223j is a counter value for determining whether or not to change the background pattern (background image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The background change counter 223j is a counter value updated in the range of “0 to 99”. In the process of S1615 of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, 1 is added and updated. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit value, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. The background selection counter 223j is a counter value acquired in the background selection processing 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in place of the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104). (FIG. 50, S111) replaces the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105), and the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) replaces the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S108). The symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) and the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) are replaced with the through-gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), and the through-gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) is a normal incoming ball. Mouth passage processing (FIG. 56, S116) is added respectively. In S101 to S103, S107, S110 to S111 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S101 to S103, S107, S110 to S111 in the first embodiment are executed.

  With reference to FIG. 50, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111). The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111) of the second embodiment is a special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) in contrast to the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 15, S104) of the first embodiment. Instead, the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is added to the processes of S320 and S330 instead of the processes of S209 and S210, respectively. The processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S203, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is executed. The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51, but the processing necessary for starting the special symbol variation is executed.

  Further, in the process of S208, it is determined what the determined jackpot type is, and if it is jackpot C or jackpot D, the jackpot round number is set to 5 rounds (S320). On the other hand, if the jackpot E or jackpot F, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 rounds (S330). Thereafter, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S211).

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the second embodiment, special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 50, S111) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. The special symbol variation start process 2 (S310) which is one process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310). The special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S204) of the first embodiment in the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S301) has been deleted. For the other processes, the same process as the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, in the second embodiment, the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S1112) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112). In the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) of the second embodiment, it is determined that the game ball has entered the distribution winning apparatus 64 and the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) in the first embodiment. Then, it is different in that processing for determining whether to change the status is executed.

  In the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning apparatus 64 (S511). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S511: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to off (S512). Thereafter, status determination processing is executed (S513). The status determination process (S513) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the status type is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the status type is set. The determining process is executed.

  The value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S514). 1 is added to the value of the obtained distributed winning ball counter 203e to be updated (S515). In addition, when the value of the acquired allocation winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, when 1 is added, the initial value is updated to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is not passing through the entrance 640 (S511: No), this process is terminated.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S516). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first start port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S516: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is set to 0 (S517). That is, the start of measurement is set for the time from when a game ball entering the first starting port 71 enters the entering port 640 to win the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S518). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640, the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to be off regardless of whether it is on or off. However, only when it is on. Of course, it may be configured to be set to off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the status determination process (S513), which is one process of the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. To do. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this status determination processing (S513).

  In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S521). It is determined whether the value of the acquired random counter 203p is a status change value (any one of 0 to 39 in this embodiment) (S522). If it is determined that the value is the status change value (S522: Yes), the value of the status selection counter 203m is acquired (S523). The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k (FIG. 44 (a)) based on the acquired values of the status selection counter 203m and the allocated winning ball number counter 203e (S524). A status command is set (generated) based on the determined status type (S525). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value of the random counter 203p is not the status change value (S522: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, it is determined by lottery whether the status is changed (determined or updated). It can be changed when triggered.

  In the status selection table 202k, the ratio of the status type to be selected is changed according to the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e. Further, since the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set so that the ratio of the pseudo variation pattern type selected by the status type is different, the player can display the variation display. The number of game balls that have entered the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted based on the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbols to be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having more fun than getting the special symbol and getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the status selection table 202k also shows the allocation winning ball for the status E that is easily selected in the range of 200 to 255 close to the value at which the value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e wins the first start port 71. Even if the value of the number counter 203e is a low value (for example, a value in the range of 0 to 60), it is configured to be selected. It can be expected that winning 71 will be near.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, the first normal symbol variation process (S113), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first normal symbol variation process (S113). In the first normal symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), the first normal symbol variation display performed in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 and the first blade of the first ordinary electric accessory are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of 64s1.

  In the first normal symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), first, it is determined whether or not the current present is being hit by the first normal symbol. (S831). The first normal symbol is being hit when the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 displays a win indicating that the first blade 64s1 of the ordinary electric accessory is controlled to open and close. Includes up to the inside. If it is determined that the first normal symbol is being hit (S831: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first normal symbol is not hit (S831: No), it is determined whether the first normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S832). When it is determined that the first normal symbol is in the variable display (S832: Yes), the variation time of the first normal symbol executed in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (S833). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S848 described later before the variable display is started in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the first normal symbol is set with a variation time of 30 seconds for both the winning variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern.

  In the process of S833, if the variation time has not elapsed (S833: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S833, when it is determined that the variation time of the first ordinary symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S833: Yes), the first ordinary symbol display unit of the second symbol display device 83. The stop display of 83a is set (S834). In the process of S834, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S844, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a first normal symbol. Display). On the other hand, if the first normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S847, the first normal symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83 displays “x” symbol. Is set to be stopped (lighted). When the stop display is set by the process of S8034, the variable display in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the display is stopped in the display mode set by the processes of S844 and S847. The symbol is stopped (lighted) on the first normal symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current first normal symbol is a win (S835). When it is determined that the current lottery result of the first normal symbol is a win (S835: Yes), opening / closing control start of the first blade 64s1 of the first normal electric accessory is set (836). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first normal symbol this time is out (S835: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S832 that the first normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S832: No), the value of the first normal symbol holding ball counter 203c1 (the holding of the variable display in the first normal symbol is suspended) The number of times M) is acquired (S837).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S838). When it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 0 (S838: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not 0 (S838: Yes), the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1. (S839).

  Next, the data stored in the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 is shifted (S840). In the process of S840, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first normal symbol hold 1 to the first normal symbol hold 4 in the first normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b1 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, first normal symbol hold 2 → first normal symbol hold 1, first normal symbol hold 3 → first normal symbol hold 2, first normal symbol hold 4 → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first normal symbol hold 3. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the first normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S841).

  The first normal symbol random number table 202c1 (based on the hit determination value in FIG. 42C), a result of the determination of success / failure is acquired (S842), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a win (S843). When it is determined that it is a win (S843: Yes), a display mode of “O”, which is a display mode for winning displayed on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83, is set. (S844) A normal symbol hit variation pattern command (in this embodiment, there is only one type of normal symbol hit variation pattern command, a command indicating the first normal symbol hit) is set (generated).

  The opening time and the number of times of the first blades 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 second and 1 time, respectively (S846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is out (S843: No), it is a display mode at the time of disconnection displayed on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. The display mode of “×” that is the display mode of is set. The variation time of the first normal symbol is set to 30 seconds.

  As for the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114), the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) is performed in the second ordinary symbol display unit 83b of the second symbol display apparatus 83 with respect to the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113). The only difference is in controlling the symbol variation display, the opening time of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory, etc., and the same control is executed. The variation time of the second ordinary symbol is also the same as that of the first ordinary symbol, and the same value is set for the opening time and the number of times of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol are configured to be able to display the variation at the same time. In addition, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric combination and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric combination are configured to be able to perform opening control at the same time.

  Thus, since the opening time and frequency | count of the 1st blade | wing 64s1 of a 1st normal electric combination and the 2nd blade | wing 64s2 of a 2nd normal electric combination are comprised by 0.5 second and 1 time, they open | release. In such a case, the length is set so that one game ball is possible. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entrance 640s1 or the second normal entrance 640s2 at a time, a ball clogging occurs or an extremely big hit is likely to occur. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol is configured to be relatively long as 30 seconds, it takes time until the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol stop changing. The number of lotteries for the second ordinary symbol is extremely increased, and the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened frequently, and the first start port is extremely increased. It is possible to prevent the player from winning 71 easily.

  Further, since the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged in series vertically, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 pass through at the same time. The first normal symbol and the second normal symbol can be easily changed at the same time. Therefore, since the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol are set to be the same, the determination result is also easily displayed at the same time, and the player can change the display result of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol. It is easy to see.

  With reference to FIG. 55, the through-gate passing process 2 (S115), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 2 (S115). In the through-gate passing process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and it is determined that it has passed. If so, the process when it passes is executed.

  In the through gate passing process 2 (FIG. 55, S115), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (S921). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (S921: Yes), the value of the first normal symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S922). It is determined whether or not the acquired value is less than the upper limit of 4 (S923). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S923: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired first normal symbol hold ball counter 203c1, and the added value is the first normal symbol hold. Stored in the ball counter 203c1 (S924). The value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (S921: No), the value of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit value 4). ) (S923: No), the process of S926 is executed.

  It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926: Yes), the value of the second normal symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S927). It is determined whether the acquired value is less than the upper limit of 4 (S928). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S928: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired second normal symbol holding ball counter 203c2, and the added value is the second symbol holding. It is stored in the ball counter 203c2 (S929). The value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 (S930). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926: No), the value of the second normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit of 4). ) (S928: No), this process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 56, the normal entrance process (S116), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance opening process (S116). In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first normal entrance 640s1 and the second normal entrance 640s2, the flow of the entered game ball flows down. The time to play is measured, and it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the ball is discharged from the sixth discharge port 650a6 to the eighth discharge port 650a8 or longer than the time to win the first start port 71 After that, a process is performed to correct the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e when one game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 or one game ball is guided to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. To do.

  In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116), it is first determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: Yes), the first common power flag 203j1 is set on (S952). Thereafter, the first general power timer 203k1 is set to 0 (S953).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: No), it is determined whether the first common power flag 203j1 is on (S954). If it is determined that the first general power flag 203j1 is on (S954: Yes), the value of the first general power timer 203k1 is incremented by 1 and updated (S955). It is determined whether the updated value exceeds the set value (5s in the present embodiment) (S956). If it is determined that the updated value exceeds the set value (S956: Yes), the first common power flag 203j1 is set to OFF (S957). Thereafter, the first distribution correction process is executed (S958). The details of the first distribution correction process (S958) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. However, since the game ball has entered from the first normal entrance 640s1, the value of the distribution winning prize counter 203e. And a shift occurs in each position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64, and a process of correcting the shift is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first power transmission flag 203j1 is off (S954: No), when it is determined that the value of the first power transmission timer 203k1 is equal to or less than the set value (S956: No), The process of S959 is executed. In the process of S959, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON (S960). Thereafter, the second power transmission timer 203k2 is set to 0 (S961).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: No), it is determined whether the second general power flag 203j2 is on (S962). When it is determined that the second power transmission flag 203j2 is on (S962: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second power transmission timer 203k2 to be updated (S963). It is determined whether or not the value of the second power transmission timer 203k2 exceeds a set value (2s in the present embodiment) (S964). If it is determined that the value of the second general power timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (S964: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to off (S965). A second distribution correction process is executed (S966). In the second distribution correction process (S966), the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is changed to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 in the process of S972 of the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958). The only difference is that the same processing is executed for the other processing, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, a first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), which is a process of the normal entrance opening process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. ). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first distribution correction process (S958).

  In the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), first, when one game ball is guided to the position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 corresponding to the current value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e. The value of the corresponding distributed winning ball counter 203e is calculated (S971). Here, for example, it is assumed that the value of the current distributed winning ball counter 203e is “100”. Since the position data of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 corresponding to the value “100” of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is “10001100”, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 is the first accommodation. The part 64c6 is in a state of facing upward. In this case, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 and is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6, the game ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c6, and the sixth distribution The rotating member 64a6 rotates leftward to guide the game ball to the sixth guide path 64z12.

  The game ball guided to the sixth guide path 64z12 is guided to the seventh sorting rotation member 64a7. Since the 7th distribution rotation member 64a7 is a position where the 2nd storage part 64d7 turned up, a game ball enters into the 2nd storage part 64d7, rotates to the right direction, and a game ball enters into the 7th guidance way 64z14 To induce. The game ball guided to the seventh guide path guides the game ball to the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8. Since the 8th distribution rotation member 64a8 is in the state where the 2nd storage part 64d8 turned up at this time, a game ball enters into the 2nd storage part 64d8, and rotates to the right direction, and the 8th discharge guide way The game ball is guided to 64z15 and discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  As a result, when the game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 when the value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e is 100, the second accommodating portion 64d6 The seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is changed to a position in which the first accommodating portion c7 is changed, and the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 is changed to a position in which the first accommodating portion c8 is turned upward. Each position information of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is “10001011”, and it is calculated that the position corresponds to the value 132 of the distributed winning ball counter 203e.

  Next, it is updated to the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e calculated in the process of S971 (S972). The value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is also updated with the same value as the updated distributed winning ball number counter (S973).

  As a result, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, a deviation occurs between the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Based on the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is corrected. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the value of the correct distribution winning ball number counter 203e is set. The processing can be performed based on this, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. In addition, the occurrence of the deviation can also suppress a problem that the game is determined as an illegal winning in spite of winning the first starting port 71 in a regular game.

  Also, since the value of the distributed discharge ball counter 203f is also corrected to match the corrected value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, the distributed winning ball is played even though a normal game is being performed. The difference between the value of the number counter 203e and the value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is an abnormal setting value (10 in this embodiment) that is determined to be abnormal in the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) described later. It is possible to prevent a problem that is determined as above.

  In the present embodiment, the correction of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball counter 203f is performed by calculation. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and there is no game ball in the distribution winning device 64. Is determined, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are detected, and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e corresponding to the position is calculated. You may comprise so that it may correct | amend. By configuring in this way, it can be corrected to a more accurate value.

  In the present embodiment, only one ball enters the first normal entrance 640s1 by setting the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory to 0.5 seconds and once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a game ball cannot directly enter the first normal entrance 640s1 (for example, the first normal entrance 640s1 in a state where the first normal electric accessory is open). A protrusion that restricts the entry of a game ball into the projection, etc.) on the upper surface where the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is open is a recess capable of holding one game ball. When the first blade 64s1 is closed with the game ball entering the recess (the protruding piece that is restricted by closing is released), the first normal entrance 640s1 enters the recess. It is good also as a structure into which the held game ball enters. By doing in this way, the malfunction which a some game ball enters into 1st normal entrance 640s1 by one opening more reliably can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory correspond to the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 may be configured to correspond to one normal symbol and be opened simultaneously. Moreover, you may comprise so that the blade | wing opened may be changed with the symbol classification per one normal symbol. By configuring in this way, two blades open at the same time, so that the player can greatly expect the game ball to enter the first normal entrance 64s1 or the second entrance 64s2. Further, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation as to which of the blades will be opened. Therefore, it can suppress getting tired of a game early.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). The main process (FIG. 58, S1200) of the second embodiment is a jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) instead of the jackpot control process (S1203) with respect to the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) of the first embodiment. However, a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) is added in place of the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207). In S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the first embodiment are executed. When the processing of S1202 is completed, jackpot control processing 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot control process 2 (S1220), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1220). The jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1200) executes a process of opening and closing the variable winning device 65 depending on the state of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is over, the jackpot control process 2 of the distribution winning device 64 is performed. The process which sets the 1st-8th distribution rotation member 64a1-64a8 in the position corresponding to the number of entering balls determined by lottery is performed.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot game is started (S1221). When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S1221: Yes), an opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (generated). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S1221: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is being played (S1223). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S1223: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1224). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1224: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is opened by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1225). A round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the newly started round number is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1224: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is satisfied (S1227). Here, the closing condition is whether a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls has been won in the specific winning opening 65a, or 30 seconds have passed since the release. Is set to

  When it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is established (S1227: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is closed by the operation of the variable winning apparatus 65 (S1228). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1229: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229). The ending effect is set when a preset number of rounds is completed.

  When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1230). It is determined whether the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231). That is, a jackpot type that executes a random setting process in which the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 after the big hit game are set to positions corresponding to the number of balls determined by lottery. It is determined whether it exists.

  When it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231: Yes), a random setting process is executed (S1232). Details of the random setting process (S1232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but the first to eighth distribution winning devices 64a1 after the jackpot game from the random number setting table 202m (see FIG. 45 (b)). A process of setting the positions of ~ 64a8 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E (S1231: No), this process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 60, the random setting process (S1232) which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this random setting process (S1232).

  In the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S1241). Based on the value of the acquired random counter 203p, the setting positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined (selected) from the random number setting table 202m (S1242). Based on the determined setting position, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are respectively set (S1243). The values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f are set to values corresponding to the determined setting positions (S1244).

  In this way, when the jackpot game is executed, if the jackpot C or jackpot F, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to the positions determined by lottery after the jackpot game and corresponding to the number of entered balls. 64a8 is set. Therefore, the player plays a jackpot game in the hope that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined by lottery, and if the jackpot C or jackpot F A game can be played in the hope that the set position corresponding to the number of incoming balls will be as large as possible.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the player to determine how many balls have been placed in the distribution winning device 64 after the big hit, the number of balls to be won in the first start port 71 is a little more. A game can be played with the expectation that it may be.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, even during the jackpot game, the player enters the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 by being guided by the tapered surface 65s formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65. It has an easy configuration. Therefore, the jackpot C or jackpot D is a big hit of five rounds, so the jackpot game time is short and the number of game balls entering the entrance 640 is small. Therefore, if the player is a big hit of 5 rounds, the player strongly expects that it is a big hit C for which the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit E or a big hit F of 16 rounds, a certain amount of game balls will enter the entrance 640. For example, even if it is not a big hit F, It is possible to reduce the number of balls required up to the number of balls to be won at one start port 71. Therefore, the player can obtain the next jackpot at an early stage and can suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the random number setting table 202m, when the value of the random counter 202p meets 90 to 99, it is set when the number of entered balls is 255. In this case, the game ball wins the first starting port 71, and a continuous jackpot can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can obtain more game balls in a shorter time, and the game preference can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery based on the prize winning is made after winning the jackpot game. May be configured to determine whether to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232). By configuring in this way, the player himself can taste the feeling that the lottery has been performed, and the enjoyment in the jackpot game can be increased.

  With reference to FIG. 61, the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) which is one process of the main process (S1200) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing 2 (S1320). In the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1321 to S1322 and S1324 to S1326 are added to the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207) of the first embodiment. Yes. In S1323, S1327 to S1332 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S1301 to S1307 in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1321, it is determined whether the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to on (S1321). If it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321: Yes), the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q. It is discriminated whether it matches the existing position data (position information) (S1322). If it is determined that they match (S1322: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1323). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 and the values of the sorting position storage area 203q do not match (S1322: No), S1327. The process is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is off (S1321: No), the process of S1324 is executed. In the processing of S1324, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e matches the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f (that is, the difference between the values is 0) (S1324). If it is determined that they match (that is, the difference is 0) (S1324: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1325). Thereafter, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored as position data (position information) in the distribution position storage area 203q. This position data is stored in the same manner as the position data of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 in the random number setting table 202m shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1327 to S1332 is the same processing as the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 28, S1207) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are stored. In addition, by checking the position until a new game ball enters the distribution winning device 64, the first to first in the state where the game ball has not won the distribution winning device 64. It is possible to monitor whether the eight distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are rotated. Therefore, the fraudulent movement of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 from the outside can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegally winning at the first start port 71 and reduce damage caused by fraud.

  With reference to FIG. 62, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). The main process (FIG. 62, S1600) of the second embodiment is a variable display setting process 2 instead of the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) as compared to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) of the first embodiment. (FIG. 64, S1630) is replaced with the pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), and the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) is replaced with the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613). 66, S1650) is replaced with command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614), and command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is added. The processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the first embodiment. For the sake of convenience, the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed after the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 63, the command determination process 2 (S1660) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1660). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) of the second embodiment replaces the processes of S1707 to S1712 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) of the first embodiment. Has been added. The processes from S1721 to S1726 and S1731 to S1735 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes from S1701 to S1706 and S1713 to S1717 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S1724, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1724; No), the process of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1727). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command is received (S1727: Yes), the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S1728).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has not been received (S1727: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1729). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1729: Yes), the status type is extracted from the received status command and stored in the secondary status storage area 223h (S1730). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1729: No), the process of S1731 is executed. Since each process from S1731 to S1735 is the same process as the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) of the second embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, in place of each process of S1903 to S1907, of S1923 to S1928. Each process has been added. The processes from S1921 to S1922 and S1929 to S1935 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes from S1901 to S1902 and S1908 to S1912 in the first embodiment.

  When the process of S1922 is executed, the process of S1923 is executed. In the process of S1923, it is determined whether any of the precursor A to precursor C pseudo-variation patterns is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1923). When it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo-variation patterns is not variably displayed (S1923: No), the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1723 of the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is acquired. (S1924). The variation pattern selected at this time is a variation display mode in which variation display of a special symbol as shown in FIG. The detailed contents are the same as those already described in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the precursor A to C pseudo-variation patterns is variably displayed (S1923: Yes), the type of the symptom pseudo-variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined what it is (S1925). When it is determined that the variation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor A pseudo variation pattern, the continuation A variation pattern is acquired as the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1926).

  Here, the precursor A pseudo variation pattern and the continuation A variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo-sign precursor A fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and an image of the hero climbing toward a high mountain is displayed (upper diagram in FIG. 46). After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol as it is, and the hero An image that climbs up to the top of the mountain is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (a), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor A simulated variation pattern, when the variation display of the switching A variation pattern does not start even after the variation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the top of the mountain and is different from the pseudo symbols on the left and right. The middle symbol stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuation B fluctuation pattern is acquired as a special symbol fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) (S1927).

  Here, the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous B fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the sign B variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the variation at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, the hero is displayed, and an image in which the hero jumps toward the sky is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous B variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol as it is, and the hero An image that has reached the top of the cloud is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heavens !!” is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor B pseudo variation pattern, when the variation display of the switching b variation pattern is not started even after the variation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the cloud, and the middle symbol is different from the left and right pseudo symbols. Stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor C pseudo variation pattern, the continuous C variation pattern is acquired as the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1928).

  Here, the precursor C pseudo variation pattern and the continuous C variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo-sign precursor C variation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the variation in ascending order at high speed (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and an image of the closed door is displayed. An image in which the closed door repeats opening and closing slightly is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol and closed. An image with the door open is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 47, the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “arrival to heaven !!” are displayed below it. Is done. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor C simulated variation pattern, if the variation display of the switching C variation pattern is not started even after the variation time has elapsed, the pseudo doors that are different from the left and right pseudo symbols are left without being opened. The middle symbol stops at the symbol and the variable display ends.

  Since each process from S1929 to S1935 is the same as the process already described in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (S1640) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation process 2 (S1640).

  In the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2021). If it is determined that the special symbol is variably displayed (S2021: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2021: No), it is determined whether the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022). If it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol variation is being displayed (S2023). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol variation is being displayed (S2023: Yes), the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern is set, and the normal variation flag 223i is set to OFF (S2024).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48A, the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern varies as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 48A when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The displayed pseudo symbol is reduced below the third symbol display device 81 and is variably displayed. The letters “Emergency News Shortcut !!” are displayed above the pseudo symbol, and the first ordinary electric accessory is displayed. The first blade 64s1 or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened, and the player enters a state where the game ball enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. To be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped (S2023: No), the normal normal pseudo variation pattern is set and the normal variation flag 223i is set to OFF (S2025).

  Here, the normal pseudo variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal pseudo variation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the characters “attack chance” are displayed, and the characters “Aim at the right chucker!” Are displayed. The first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened to allow a game ball to enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. Informs that it will be in a state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is off (S2022: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2026). Here, the pseudo symbol variation display includes the fact that the variation is displayed in an interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern and a normal ordinary pseudo variation pattern. If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is in a variable display (S2026: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2026: No), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2027). A pseudo variation pattern of a pseudo symbol is selected from the pseudo variation table 222a (see FIG. 44B) based on the acquired value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the sub status storage area 223h. (S2028). Based on the selected (set) pseudo fluctuation pattern, a display pseudo fluctuation pattern command is set (generated).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44B, the pseudo variation table 222a is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol corresponding to the status type. Specifically, in status E, the precursor C pseudo-variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a, and status D, status C, status B, and status A are sequentially arranged in this order. The selection ratio is set to be low in the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern. In addition, for the precursor B fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected at the time of status C is set to be high, and for the precursor A fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected at the time of status B is configured to be the highest. ing.

  In addition, each status is set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 so that the proportion selected according to the value in the distributed winning ball counter 203e is different. Therefore, depending on the selection frequency of the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol It is configured to be able to predict the number of game balls won in the current distribution winning device 64.

  Therefore, the more skilled the game is, the more predictable the number of game balls that have won the distribution winning device 64 can be from a pseudo-pattern variation pattern. Therefore, not only the special symbol jackpot but also the enjoyment of prediction can be obtained, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage. Further, the more the game is played, the more the pachinko machine 10 can determine the state, and the player can play the game for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol hit variation pattern is received, the predetermined notification mode is divided and displayed in the pseudo symbol state on the pseudo symbol. If a pseudo-symbol variation pattern is received and a pseudo-symbol is being displayed, the pseudo-symbol is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, a chance such as 341), and a normal symbol is displayed to the player. You may comprise so that you may alert | win. By configuring in this way, the player can be more interested in pseudo-variable display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, background selection process 2 (S1650), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the background selection process 2 (S1650).

In the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650), first, the value of the background change counter 223j is acquired (S2121). It is determined whether the acquired value of the background change counter 223j is greater than 50, that is, 51 or more (S2122). When it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 51 or more (S2122: Yes), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2123). A background pattern (background image type) is selected (determined) from the background selection table 222b based on the obtained status type (status information) stored in the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the sub status storage area 223h (S2124). . A display background command based on the selected background pattern is set (generated). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 50 or less (S2122: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, whether or not to change the background image is determined by lottery, so that the background image can be changed with a random opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting lost in the game.

  In addition, since the background pattern is set so that the ratio to be selected based on the status type is different, the player enters the current distribution winning device 64 according to the frequency of the displayed background pattern. The number can be predicted.

  Further, the status E that is easy to be selected with a large value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is also selected when the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is relatively small (for example, 10). Therefore, in actuality, even if there are few game balls won in the distribution winning device 64, with the expectation that it will become the number of balls that will be won in the first start port 71 in a short time. A game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the number of game balls to be won at the first start opening 71 enters the sorting prize winning device 64.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It may be provided in the machine 10 so that the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is output to the pachinko machine 10 outside. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the number of game balls won in the current distribution prize winning device 64 at the judgment of the game store. Therefore, it is possible to make more players visit the store by notifying the game store of information that is advantageous to the player.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the third flow path for the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means And a second flow path switching means that alternately distributes between the second flow path and the fourth flow path, and a entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, whether or not to determine whether or not the game is appropriate, and whether or not the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination means is true, A gaming machine A1 having a privilege game execution means to be given.

  The gaming machine A1 has the following effects. That is, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching member are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early.

  The gaming machine A1 has game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switch means, and the game ball distribution means is a distribution that allows game balls to enter. A ball entrance, a guide path for guiding the game ball entered from the entrance to the first flow path switching means, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the first flow path switching means are discharged. And a second discharge port for discharging the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game balls that have entered from the distribution entrance port where the game balls can enter are the first flow paths. It is guided to the switching means by a taxiway. The game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means are discharged from the first discharge port. Further, the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means are discharged through the second discharge port. This makes it easy for the player to distribute the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path where the game balls are not inserted into the entrance opening due to the game balls being discharged from the first exit or the second exit. Can be recognized. Therefore, the progress of the game can be easily recognized without concentrating on whether or not the player has entered the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, to the special entrance where the success / failure determination unit executes the success / failure determination based on the entrance of a game ball different from the entrance, and in the normal gaming state, to the special entrance Entry restriction that makes it difficult to enter the game ball and sets the game ball to the special entrance more easily than in the normal game state in a special game state different from the normal game state And a bonus game type determining means for determining a normal bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and a special bonus game that sets the gaming status after the bonus game to the special gaming state; The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the special entrance slot in the special gaming state is configured such that a game ball can enter more easily than the entrance slot.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the game ball enters a special entrance different from the entrance, the success / failure determination unit executes the determination of success / failure. In the normal game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special entrance, and in the special game state different from the normal game state, the game ball enters the special entrance than in the normal game state It is easily set by the entrance restriction means. The bonus game type determining means determines the normal bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and the special bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the special gaming state. In the special game state, the special entrance is configured such that the game ball can enter more easily than the entrance. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a game ball enters the entrance for every predetermined number of times and the winning / no-go determination is executed. However, when entering the special game state, the game ball enters the special entrance more easily. Since a ball is possible, an efficient game can be provided. Therefore, the player can play different games between the normal game state and the special game state, and can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are a first storage section that can receive a game ball and a first storage section that can receive a game ball. A different second storage portion, the first storage portion, and the second storage portion are provided, and rotate by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, so that the second flow path or the fourth flow path The game balls are distributed to the first housing part and rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first housing part, and the game balls are rotated by receiving the game balls in the first housing part at the first position. Rotating means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotating the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second storage portion; and at the first position or the second position, Before receiving the sphere in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, the first position is changed from the first position. Position or gaming machine the pivot means from the second position to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  An initial control means for executing either one of an initialization control process for initializing a gaming machine when power is turned on to the gaming machine and an initial control process for setting to a state immediately before the power is turned off; In a gaming machine having a normal control means for executing a normal control process for executing a normal game after the control process or the initial control process is executed, the game ball is connected to the first flow path and the second flow First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path The second flow path switching means, the entrance where a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter, and that the game ball has entered the entrance , Whether or not to determine whether or not the game is successful, and whether or not the game is successful On the basis of the fact that the fixed result is a win, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means in the bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game to the player, and in the initialization control process And an initial switching setting means for setting the game ball in a state where it can be distributed to a predetermined flow path.

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. In other words, when the gaming machine is turned on, either the initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine or the initial control process for setting the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed by the initial control means. After the initialization control process and the initial control process are executed, a normal control process for executing a normal game is executed by the normal control means. The game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. By the initialization control process, at least one of the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit is set by the initial switching setting unit so that the game balls can be distributed to a predetermined channel. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early. In addition, when the gaming machine is initialized, the flow path to which the game balls are distributed is set to be a predetermined flow path, so that the game balls enter the entrance from the initial state. It is possible to set the number of game balls required for the game to a certain level or more. Therefore, the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of each gaming machine can be reduced by setting the initial state.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the first storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion and distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. The first storage portion is rotated to a first position where the game ball can be received, and the first storage portion is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first storage portion at the first position. Rotating means for allocating the game balls to the three flow paths and rotating the game balls to a second position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion; and at the first position or the second position, From the first position to the second position or the second position before being received in the receiving part or the second receiving part The rotation means to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting from the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. The game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is rotated to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  In the gaming machine B2, the initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to the first position, the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit are set to the first position by the initial switching setting unit. It is possible to set the number of game balls required to be distributed to the flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means and enter the ball entrance to the maximum. Therefore, by initializing the gaming machine, the setting between the gaming machines can be made equal, and the game can be damaged by being put into the entrance early and being given a jackpot early. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, an initial time for determining whether the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit set by the initial switching setting unit are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. Switching position determination means, and the previous initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, respectively, based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determination means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the initial switching position determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. Based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determining means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively set by the initial switching setting means. As a result, when the gaming machine is initialized, the setting of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means is set randomly each time in each gaming machine. The setting of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means can be easily set differently. Therefore, even if the player is an initialized gaming machine, the player can select a gaming machine with a pleasure of selecting a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player from a plurality of gaming machines. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of playing more games.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the third flow path for the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means And a second flow path switching means that alternately distributes between the second flow path and the fourth flow path, and a entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, whether or not to determine whether or not the game is appropriate, and whether or not the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination means is true, A state in which the game balls are distributed to which flow path is set for at least one of the award game execution means to be given and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the bonus game ends. And a flow path determining means for determining whether or not to play the game machine. 1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early. In addition, after the bonus game is over, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly until the game balls enter the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. It can be expected. Therefore, more enjoyment can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the second storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, and the game ball is placed in the second flow path or the fourth flow path. It distributes and rotates to the 1st position which can receive a game ball in the 1st storage part, and it rotates by receiving the game ball in the 1st storage part in the 1st position. Rotating means that distributes the game balls to the third flow path and rotates the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion, and the game balls are moved to the second position in the first position or the second position. The first position to the second position or the second position Gaming machine C2, wherein said rotating means to the first position from the position in which having a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  In the gaming machine C2, the flow path determining means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to either the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. The rotation means is an autonomous rotation that rotates the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to the positions determined by the flow path determination means, respectively. A gaming machine C3 having means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on a predetermined lottery, the flow path determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means at the positions determined by the flow path determination means. Thereby, the setting after the privilege game of a 1st flow path switching means and a 2nd flow path switching means can be performed easily. Therefore, the process at the end of the bonus game can be reduced, and the time until the normal game is executed after the bonus game can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first flow path switching unit and the first flow path switching unit according to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching unit before the game ball enters the entrance port. A setting table in which settings for each of the second flow path switching means are stored, and the flow path determination means is necessary for causing a game ball to enter the entrance according to the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means is determined, and the settings of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are determined from the setting table based on the number of game balls. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that each is determined.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means is made in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game ball into the entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game balls into the entrance is determined, and from the setting table, the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second channel switching unit is determined by the channel determining unit. Accordingly, the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member can be easily set in accordance with the number of game balls required to enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after executing the privilege game.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result or the game information relating to the game and the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is successful are displayed on the display means A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player, the game machine having a sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize winning means A distribution entrance port through which game balls can enter into the prize winning means, and game balls that enter the distribution entrance port are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the two flow paths into a third flow path and a fourth flow path that leads to the entrance hole, and in the distribution prize winning means And a game information determination means for determining the game information to be displayed on the display means based on the count value of the distribution prize counting means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The identification information or game information related to the game is displayed on the display means based on the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means alternately flow into the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The route is switched by the path switching means. The number of game balls in the distribution prize winning means is counted by the distribution prize counting means. The game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the game information determination means based on the count value of the distribution winning prize counting means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. In addition, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, game balls will enter the entrance, so how long the player can enter the entrance, It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the distribution winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. In addition, since the game information displayed on the display means is determined by the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means, the game information is displayed at random opportunities, and the player can play the game Can be prevented from being bored.

  In the gaming machine D1, the number-of-entry counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance, and the game information determining means are configured such that the count value of the in-distribution prize counting means is a predetermined count value. The game machine D2 is characterized in that one game information is determined from a plurality of different types of game information based on a count value of the number-of-entry counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance is counted by the entrance number counting means. When the count value of the distribution prize counting means is a predetermined count value, one game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution prize counting means among a plurality of different types of game information. Determined by means. As a result, the game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution winning award counting means, so the player is notified of information regarding the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means according to the determined game information. Can do. Therefore, the player determines the number of game balls to be entered into the allocation winning means required before entering the entrance from the information on the number of game balls won in the allocation winning means from the game information. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is information related to background information on which the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is composed of information related to background information of the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Even when playing, the game information can be confirmed, and information about the game can be obtained.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are a first storage unit that can receive a game ball and a first storage unit that can receive a game ball. A different second storage portion, the first storage portion, and the second storage portion are provided, and rotate by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, so that the second flow path or the fourth flow path The game balls are distributed to the first housing part and rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first housing part, and the game balls are rotated by receiving the game balls in the first housing part at the first position. Rotating means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotating the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second storage portion; and at the first position or the second position, Before the ball is received in the first receiving part or the second receiving part, Gaming machine and said second said rotating means and position or from the second position to the first position are those having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. To rotate. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result or the game information relating to the game and the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is successful are displayed on the display means A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player, the game machine having a sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize winning means A distribution entrance port through which game balls can enter into the prize winning means, and game balls that enter the distribution entrance port are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the two flow paths into a third flow path and a fourth flow path that guides the game balls to the entrance opening; In response to the establishment of the number-of-balls counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game and the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information that is one of the game information, A pseudo-dynamic display mode determining unit that determines one pseudo-dynamic display mode among the dynamic display modes of the plurality of pseudo-identification information based on the count value of the entry ball number counting unit; A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The identification information or game information related to the game is displayed on the display means based on the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance gate, the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is guided out of the distribution winning means. The flow path and the second flow path are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. A game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means is guided to the third flow path and the ball entrance where the game balls are guided out of the distribution winning means. Alternating with the flow path, the second flow path switching means distributes them. The count value is updated by the number-of-entry counting means based on the game ball entering the distribution entrance. Triggered by the establishment of a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo-identification information that is one of game information, one of a plurality of pseudo-identification information dynamic display modes based on the count value of the number-of-entry counting means The pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determination means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Moreover, since the dynamic display mode of the pseudo identification information, which is one of the game information, is determined and dynamically displayed based on the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means, the pseudo dynamic display mode Thus, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means can be determined by the player. Therefore, even when a game ball does not enter the entrance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the pseudo dynamic display mode determination means sets the pseudo dynamic display mode as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo identification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the distribution entrance. A gaming machine E2 that is to be determined.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo-dynamic display mode determination means as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information that the game ball has entered the distribution entrance, Since dynamic display is started in the pseudo-dynamic display mode at the timing when a game ball enters the distribution winning means, the timing at which the pseudo-dynamic display mode dynamically displays can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize at which timing the pseudo dynamic display mode is based on what has entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately recognize the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means than the pseudo dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is displayed while the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means Has a display switching means for switching the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means and the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is displayed, the pseudo dynamic display mode is identified. It is switched to display of information by the display switching means. Therefore, even if the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the display can be switched to the display of the identification information, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of the identification information.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a dynamic identification display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information as one dynamic identification display mode among a plurality of dynamic identification display modes; When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode determining means determines a dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode, 2. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode is determined when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display. The gaming machine E4 according to any one of 3 to 4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, among the plurality of dynamic identification display modes, the dynamic identification display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. When the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. On the other hand, when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. The As a result, the dynamic identification display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamically displayed pseudo dynamic display mode, so that the player feels unnatural to switch from the pseudo dynamic display mode to the dynamic identification display mode. Can be prevented. Thus, the player can draw attention to the pseudo-dynamic display mode by identifying the content of the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a dynamic display linked to the dynamic identification display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance The distribution winning means has a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and the game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port in the first flow path. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means movable alternately between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path; and the second flow by the first flow path switching means. A fourth position for guiding the game ball distributed to the road to the third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and the entrance. A second flow path switching unit having a second distribution movable unit that is alternately movable to a fourth position that is distributed to the road, and a position determination unit that determines at least the position of the second distribution movable unit Position monitoring means for determining whether the position is a normal position based on the position with the second distribution movable means determined by the position determination means when a game ball enters the entrance The gaming machine F1 includes an abnormality process executing unit that executes an abnormality process when the position monitoring unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the first position at which the game balls that enter the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. And a first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means that is alternately movable to a second position that is distributed to the second flow path. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port The distribution is performed by the second flow path switching unit having the second distribution movable unit that is movable alternately. The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether it is a normal position based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determination means. Then, when the position monitoring unit determines that there is an abnormality, the abnormality process is executed by the abnormality process execution unit. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Further, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined based on the position of the second displacing movable means whether it is an abnormal entry, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, damage caused by illegally entering the entrance can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the entrance, if the game ball enters the distribution entrance later than the entered game ball, There is subsequent position determining means for determining that the game ball that has entered moves the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, and the position monitoring means has a game ball at the entrance. A gaming machine F2, which, when entering a ball, determines whether the position is a normal position based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance gate, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance after the entered game ball, the game ball entered after that The subsequent position determining means determines that the first distribution moving means and the second distribution moving means are moved. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position determination unit determines whether the position is a normal position based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination unit. Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance, it can be more accurately determined whether or not the entrance into the entrance by normal game. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, an allocation winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the fourth flow path for guiding the game, The number-of-entrance counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that the ball has entered the game ball and the game ball whose count value is distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means If the value indicates that the game ball has reached the count value, the measuring means for measuring the time after the game ball passed through the distribution entrance, and the game ball entered the entrance And determining whether or not the measurement time of the measuring means is within the effective time, and if it is outside the effective period, the abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process for abnormal entry A gaming machine G1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The count value is updated by the number-of-entry counting means based on the game ball entering the distribution entrance. When the count value is a value indicating that a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the game ball that becomes the count value is allocated. The time after passing through the ball opening is measured by the measuring means. When a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined whether the measurement time of the measuring means is within the effective time. If it is outside the effective period, abnormal processing for abnormal entry is monitored for abnormal entry. Executed by means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. In addition, when a game ball enters the entrance, if it is determined that it has entered outside the effective time, abnormal processing as an abnormal entrance is executed, so the entrance to the entrance due to fraud Can reduce the damage.

  In the gaming machine G1, the abnormal entry monitoring means detects an abnormality with respect to the abnormal entry when a game ball does not enter the entrance even after the effective period of time measured by the measurement means elapses. A gaming machine G2 that executes processing.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, even if the valid period of the measurement time by the measuring means has passed, if the game ball does not enter the entrance, the abnormal entry monitoring means executes an abnormal process for the abnormal entrance. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball that will enter the entrance gate has entered the distribution entrance entrance, even if the effective period has passed, Since the abnormal process is executed, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has been entered into the distribution winning means due to fraud, or that a ball is jammed in the distribution winning means due to a problem. Therefore, damage caused by fraud or a player's disadvantage due to malfunction can be detected and improved at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the abnormal entry monitoring means has a value that indicates that the count value has entered a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth passage by the second passage switching means. A gaming machine G3, which is not discriminated and executes an abnormal process for the abnormal entry when a game ball enters the entrance with the measuring means in a non-timed state. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the count value of the number-of-entrance counting means is not determined to be a value indicating that a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means is entered, and the measurement means is not If a game ball enters the entrance when it is in the timekeeping state, abnormal processing for abnormal entrance is executed by the abnormal entrance monitoring means. As a result, even when a ball is entered when it is not a condition to enter the entrance, it is processed as an abnormal entry, so that it is possible to detect fraud and defects at an early stage. Therefore, the game can be performed normally by detecting at an early stage a fraud in which a ball is illegally detected by a radio wave or the like, or a malfunction due to a ball jam or the like.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately allocating to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and entering the distribution ball opening Based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, a number-of-entry counting means for counting the number of gaming balls, a number-of-ejecting ball counting means for counting the number of gaming balls derived from the first flow path or the third flow path, When it is determined that there is a difference between the comparison value by the comparison means for comparing the count value of the number-of-balls counting means and the count value of the number-of-balls counting means, and the comparison result by the comparison means is not less than a predetermined abnormal number In addition, the gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as abnormal entry.

  According to the gaming machine H1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance is counted by the entrance number counting means. Also, the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path is counted by the discharged ball number counting means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, the count value of the number-of-balls counting means and the count value of the number-of-balls counting means are compared by the comparison means. When it is determined that the comparison result by the comparison means has a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of abnormalities, the abnormal processing as abnormal entry is executed by the abnormal entry monitoring means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Also, since the difference between the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means and the discharged game ball is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, it is determined whether or not the distribution winning means has been illegally entered. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such that the game winning ball is illegally made to enter the game winning prize means from other than the game entrance ball opening. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately allocating to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and entering the distribution ball opening The number of entered balls is added based on the fact that the game ball is guided from the first flow path or the third flow path, and based on the fact that the number of entered balls is subtracted from the number of entered balls. The counting means for counting the number of game balls being played, and the abnormal counting when the count value of the counting means during counting is determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number And an abnormal entrance monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as a gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The number of entered balls is added based on having entered the distribution entrance, and the number of entered balls is subtracted from the number of entered balls based on the guidance of the game ball from the first channel or the third channel. The number of game balls entering the prize winning means is counted by the counting means during entering. When it is determined that the count value of the counting means during entering is greater than or equal to a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, abnormal processing as abnormal entering is executed by the abnormal entering monitoring means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Further, the game balls being entered are counted in the distribution winning means, and it is determined whether the count value is equal to or greater than the abnormal number or less than the normal number, thereby determining whether or not the distribution winning means is illegally entered. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such that the game winning ball is illegally made to enter the game winning prize means from other than the game entrance ball opening. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance The distribution winning means has a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and the game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port in the first flow path. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means movable alternately between a first position to be distributed and a second position to be distributed to the second flow path; and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A fourth position where the game balls distributed to the flow path are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. And a second flow path switching means having a second flow path moving means that are alternately movable, and determining positional information of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, respectively. Position determination means, distribution ball determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the distribution winning means, and game balls are placed in the distribution winning means by the distribution ball determination means. The position determined by the position determining means as an abnormal operation when the position of at least one of the first distributing movable means and the second distributing movable means is changed in a state where it is determined that the ball has not entered. A game characterized by comprising: an abnormal operation determining means for determining based on information; and an abnormal process executing means for executing an abnormal process when the abnormal operation determining means determines that the abnormal operation has occurred. Machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance where the game balls can enter the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. The first distribution moving means of the first flow path switching means is alternately moved to the position and the second position to be distributed to the second flow path, so that the distribution is performed. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port Allocation is performed by alternately moving the second distribution moving means of the second flow path switching means. Position information indicating the positions of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. During the state in which it is determined that the game ball has not entered the distribution winning means by the distribution ball determining means for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the distribution winning means, the first distribution It is determined by the abnormality determining means based on the position information determined by the position determining means that an abnormal operation is that the position of at least one of the movable means and the second distributing movable means is variable. When it is determined that the abnormal operation is performed by the abnormality determination means, the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing execution means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, when the game ball has not entered the distribution winning means and the position is changed to at least one of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, abnormal processing is performed as an abnormal operation. Since it is executed, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of illegally operating the distribution winning means and illegally entering the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the first storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion and distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. The first storage portion rotates to the first position or the third position where the game ball can be received, and the first storage portion receives the game ball at the first position or the third position. A rotating means that moves and distributes the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotates the game balls to the second position or the fourth position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion; In the first position or the second position, the game ball is moved to the first housing part or the second position. First rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the turning means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received by the container; and the third In the position or the fourth position, the turning means from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. And a second turning restricting means for restricting the turning of the gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first position or the third position where the game balls can be received in the first housing portion, and the first position or the third position. The game ball can be rotated by receiving the game ball into the first housing portion at a position, and the received game ball can be distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path so that the game ball can be received in the second storage section. It is rotated by the rotation means to the second position or the fourth position. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the first rotation regulating means. Further, in the third position or the fourth position, the rotating means rotates from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first storage part or the second storage part. This is restricted by the second rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, or the third position and the fourth position, so that the game balls can be reliably swung alternately. Can be divided. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position, from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position, the game ball is accommodated in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation. Since it is regulated when the ball is not entering the part, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being continuously received in the same storage part. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, Based on the determination result, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game for giving the bonus to the player, the open state capable of guiding the game ball to the inside, and guiding the game ball to the inside A determination condition for determining whether the movable piece can be changed from the closed state to the open state based on the movable piece movable to a closed state that makes it difficult to move and the game ball entering or passing through. The lottery determination means for executing the lottery for changing the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of the determination condition, the specific entrance that is determined to be satisfied, and the lottery determination means If judged And a movable means for moving the movable piece from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time, the game machine further comprising a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The prize-winning means includes a sort-in slot that allows a game ball to enter the sort-out prize means, and a game ball that has entered the sort-in prize slot into the first channel and the second channel. First flow path switching means that distributes alternately, and a second flow that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path A path switching means, and an introduction guiding path for guiding a game ball to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means from the outside of the distribution winning means, At the guide port communicating with the outside of the distribution winning means, the movable piece closes the guide port in the closed state and plays in the open state. Gaming machine J1, wherein those that are configured provided to direct the ball into the introduction guide path game balls.

  According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. Judgment criteria for determining whether or not the movable piece that can be moved between an open state in which the game ball can be guided and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to guide is variable is based on the game ball entering the specific entrance The lottery is executed by the lottery determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. When it is determined that the lottery result is a win, the movable piece is moved from the closed state to the open state by a movable unit for a predetermined time. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. A game ball is guided from the outside of the distribution winning means to the at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means by the introduction guide path. The movable piece provided at the guide port of the introduction guide route closes the guide port in the closed state, and guides the game ball to the introduction guide route in the open state. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. Further, since the movable piece is opened in at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game ball can be guided from the outside of the distribution winning means, so that the player A game ball can enter directly without going through the ball opening, so you can feel the freshness. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that allows a variable winning device that grants a bonus to a player to win a game ball based on the determination result of winning or failure, There is a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, and the allocation winning means is a distribution entrance that allows a game ball to enter in the allocation winning means, and the distribution entrance First flow path switching means having first distribution movable means that is movable alternately between a first position where game balls entering the ball opening are distributed to the first flow path and a second position where the game balls are distributed to the second flow path. And a third game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means having a second distribution movable means that is movable alternately between a third position that is distributed to the road and a fourth position that is distributed to the fourth flow path that is guided to the entrance. The variable winning device and the distribution winning means are respectively arranged at positions where the game ball can enter the distribution entrance when the game ball enters the variable winning device. A gaming machine K1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, the privilege game execution unit executes a privilege game that allows a variable winning device that provides a privilege to the player to win a game ball. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance where the game balls can enter the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. The first distribution moving means of the first flow path switching means is alternately moved to the position and the second position to be distributed to the second flow path, so that the distribution is performed. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port Allocation is performed by alternately moving the second distribution moving means of the second flow path switching means. The variable winning device and the distribution winning means are respectively arranged at positions where the game balls can be inserted into the distribution entrance when the game balls are inserted into the variable winning device. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, during the award game, it is possible to enter the distribution entrance, so that during the award game, by entering the allocation winning means, before entering the entrance after the award game. The required number of balls can be reduced, and the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can be motivated to enter a lot of game balls not only in the variable prize apparatus but also in the distribution prize means during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K1, at least the special award game with a long opening time of the variable winning means and a normal award game with a shorter opening time of the variable winning means than the special award game are set in the award game, and the success / failure determination is performed. A gaming machine K2 having a bonus game type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game based on the result of the determination of success / failure by the means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. In other words, at least a special award game with a long opening time of the variable winning means and a normal award game with a shorter opening time of the variable winning means than the special award game are set in the award game. Based on the winning result, the bonus game type is determined by the bonus game type determining means. Thereby, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable winning device is lengthened, but also an opportunity for more game balls to enter the distribution winning means can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more benefits for the type of privilege game.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable winning device has a rotating door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine so that the variable winning device is normally in a state where the rotating door is standing upright. The game ball is restricted from entering inside, and when the bonus game is executed, the revolving door rotates to the front side of the gaming machine and receives the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the revolving door, A gaming machine K3 configured to be guided to the variable winning device and to the distribution entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable prize device is provided with a pivot door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In a normal state, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize device by the pivoting door in the standing state. When the privilege game is executed, the turning door is turned to the front side of the gaming machine, so that the game ball received on the upper surface of the turning door is guided to the variable winning device and the distribution entrance. As a result, during the bonus game, more game balls can be entered into the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game after the bonus game, and to allow the player to play the game for a longer time.

  The gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a7 seventh distribution rotating member (first flow path switching means)
64a8 eighth distribution rotating member (second flow path switching means)
64b7, 64b8 magnet (rotation restricting means)
71 First start (entrance)
201 MPU (win / fail judgment means)
263 Sorting position adjustment motor (autonomous rotation means)
S103 (privilege game execution means)
S1232 (channel determining means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Have been proposed to be implemented in.

  For example, in Patent Document 1, the probability that a game ball wins a prize at a start port provided on the game board surface is changed by adjusting a distance between nails provided on the game board surface.

JP 2003-305209 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, the process until the game ball wins the start opening is monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game when playing for a long time.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first flow path switching unit that alternately distributes game balls into a first flow path and a second flow path, and the first flow path switching unit. Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to a third flow path and a fourth flow path, and a fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means A game entrance that can enter a game ball flowing down, a game determination unit that determines whether or not the game is successful based on the game ball entering the game entrance, and a test result determination by the program determination unit. Based on the result being a win, at least one of the privilege game execution means for granting a privilege game to the player, and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the bonus game ends. For one side, determine the flow path to determine which flow path the game ball is assigned to And the step, and has a.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means.

  Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early.

  In addition, after the bonus game is over, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly until the game balls enter the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. It can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that more enjoyment can be provided to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side in the state which won the game ball in the distribution apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment, a special symbol execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number table per special symbol in 1st Embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary symbol in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special hit classification counter in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the pseudo fluctuation table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the background selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect of the special symbol displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is a pseudo | simulation in the ceiling variation pattern displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during fluctuation | variation of. It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is started during the fluctuation | variation of pseudo | simulation symbols other than the ceiling fluctuation pattern displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the ending alerting | reporting aspect for alert | reporting to a player that it was a jackpot with the short time displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) ) Is a diagram schematically showing an ending notification mode for notifying the player that it was a big hit without time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a background display mode of a precursor A displayed on the third symbol display device, and (d) schematically shows a background display mode of a precursor B displayed on the third symbol display device. (E) is the figure which showed typically the background display mode of precursor C displayed with a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the allocation apparatus error alerting | reporting control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution prize process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution discharge process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of distribution position initialization process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of distribution position initialization process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the figure which saw through the inside from the front side the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which looked through the inside from the front side in the state which the game ball won in the distribution device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the perspective view which expanded the variable winning device and the distribution winning device in jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 2nd Embodiment, a special symbol execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number table per special symbol in 2nd Embodiment. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per first normal symbol in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a random number table per second normal symbol in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the special hit classification table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the status selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the pseudo | simulation variation table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the background selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the random number setting table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the variation mode in case the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of the precursor A pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (B) schematically shows the variation mode when the variation of the special symbol is started while varying the precursor B pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the variation mode in case the variation of a special symbol is started during the variation of the precursor C pseudo variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) shows a variation mode when an interrupt normal pseudo variation mode corresponding to a normal symbol is started while the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is varied. It is the figure shown typically, (b) is the normal normal corresponding to the hit of a normal symbol when the variation mode of the pseudo symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the second embodiment is stopped It is the figure which showed typically the fluctuation | variation aspect in case a pseudo | simulation variation aspect is started. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status determination process which is one process of the distribution prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance opening process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st distribution correction process which is one process of the normal entrance opening process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the random setting process which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution error process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is an illustration of an allocation prize device 64 provided on the game board 13. 4 is a perspective view of the inside from the front, FIG. 4 is a detailed view of the inside of the distribution prime 64 provided in the game board 13 as seen through from the front, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later is changed (for example, the color of the displayed character is variable). .

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a distribution winning device 64, The two-start winning device 300, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The distribution winning device 64, the second starting port 300, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A distribution winning device 64 is provided at the lower center of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 64 when viewed from the front. The distribution winning device 64 is configured by a vertically long case body, and a ball entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the distribution winning device 64. The entrance 640 is composed of a gate type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed. Inside the distribution winning device 64, there is provided a first distribution rotation member 64a1 capable of distributing game balls to the left and right by rotating. The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is pivotally supported by the case body constituting the distribution winning device 64 so as to be rotatable.

  The case body constituting the distribution winning device 64 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate PC or the like) whose inside can be seen through. The case body has a pattern printed with paint so that the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 provided therein are difficult to visually recognize (for example, a pattern of ripples with narrow intervals, characters such as numerals). Is drawn, and the movement of the game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64 can be visually recognized from the gap in the pattern.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to recognize the positions and states of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, and by visually observing the distribution winning device 64 from the outside of the gaming machine, It can be configured that it is difficult to determine how many balls will be awarded to the first start opening 71.

  The first distribution rotating member 64a1 is formed in a semicircular shape, and the wall portion protrudes from the center of the semicircle in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction to the front side of the gaming machine, and passes through the entrance 640. The first storage portion 64c1 and the second storage portion 64d1 that can receive the game balls. The first sorting rotation member 64a1 is a wall portion that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is formed vertically upward from the center of the semicircle with the semicircular arc directed upward. Where the first storage portion 64c1 is directed upward (in the direction of the entrance 640) and the second storage portion 64d1 is above the entrance (the entrance 640). The shaft is pivotally supported by about 90 degrees to the left and right. Specifically, when the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is rotated to the right and the first storage portion 64c1 is rotated to a position facing the upper side of the gaming machine, the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is further moved to the right. The rotation is prohibited by coming into contact with a stopper (not shown) that prohibits rotation in the direction. From the state in which the first housing portion 64c1 is directed upward, the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is rotated leftward so that the second housing portion 64d1 is located in the upward direction. The rotation of the member 64a1 is prohibited by coming into contact with a stopper portion (not shown) that prohibits the member 64a1 from rotating further to the left. In other words, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 uses the position where the first accommodating portion 64c1 is directed upward as a rotation region in the right direction, and the position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 is directed upward is rotated in the left direction. It is configured as an area.

  The first distribution rotating member 64a1 receives the game ball that has passed through the entrance 640 in the first accommodation portion 64c1 or the second accommodation portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. When a game ball is received in the first housing portion 64c1, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 3) due to the weight of the game ball. Guide to the first discharge guide path 64z1 leading to the discharge port 650a1. Here, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left and right directions (rotation angle with the state where the magnet 64b1 is directed vertically upward as the origin), and the first accommodating rotation part 64c1. A magnet 64b1 is provided at the tip of the boundary wall with the second housing portion 64d1.

  The distribution winning device 64 includes the second distribution rotation member 64a2, the third distribution rotation member 64a3, the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and the fifth distribution, which are configured in the same manner as the first distribution rotation member 64a1. A rotation member 64a5, a sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, a seventh distribution rotation member 64a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 are respectively attached. The second distribution rotation member 64a2 is attached to a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d1 receive the game balls rolled on the first guide path 64z2 on the lower right side of the first distribution rotation member 64a1. It has been. On the lower left side of the second distribution rotation member 64a2, there is a third position where the game balls distributed by the first housing portion 64c2 of the second distribution rotation member 64a2 are received by the game balls that have rolled on the second guide path 64z4. A sorting rotation member 64a3 is attached. The fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is attached to a position where the game ball distributed by the second storage portion 64d3 receives the game ball rolled on the third guide path 64z6 at the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3. Has been. A fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is attached to a position diagonally below and to the left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 at a position where the game ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c4 is received by the game ball rolled on the fourth guide path 64z8. ing. The sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is attached to the lower right of the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 at a position where the game balls distributed by the second storage portion 64d5 receive the game balls rolled on the fifth guide path 64z10. Has been. A seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is attached to a position on the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 at a position where the game ball distributed by the first accommodating portion 64c6 is received by the game ball rolled on the sixth guide path 64z12. ing. The eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is attached to the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 at a position where the game ball distributed by the second storage portion 64d7 receives the game ball rolled on the seventh guide path 64z14. Has been. The second to eighth distribution rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are a game ball flowing down the first to seventh guide paths 64z2 to 64z14 and magnets 64b1 to 64b1 at positions of the respective distribution rotating members facing the game machine. It is arranged at a position where it collides with 64b8.

  The back side base body to which the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are attached includes a first base side magnet 900a1, a second base side magnet 900a2, a third base side magnet 900a3, and a fourth base side magnet. 900a4, fifth base side magnet 900a5, sixth base side magnet 900a6, seventh base side magnet 900a7, and eighth base side magnet 900a8 are arranged. The first to eighth base-side magnets 900a1 to 900a8 face the position where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 face vertically upward and to the positions facing each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Are arranged as follows.

  More specifically, the magnet 64b1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the first base-side magnet 900a1 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the back-side base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. . The first base-side magnet 900a1 is arranged and fixed so that the front end portion faces the first sorting rotation member 64a1.

  Similarly to the first base side magnet 900a1, the magnet 64b1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and the first sorting rotation is performed so that the tip portion faces the first base side magnet 900a1 side. It is fixed to the member 64a1. The first base rotating magnet 64a1 rotates and the first base-side magnet 900a1 and the first base-side magnet 900a1 are positioned at a position where the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is directly above (on the center line of the entrance 640). The magnet 64b1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 is the closest position (tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the right or left.

  As a result, when the boundary wall between the first housing portion 64c1 and the second housing portion 64d1 is at a position (vertical upper position) on the center line of the entrance 640, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 And the first base-side magnet 900a1 repel, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 rotates to the left or right, and either the first accommodation part 64c1 or the second accommodation part 64d1 is assigned to the prize distribution device. 64 is directed to the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the ball 64. Therefore, the entered game ball comes into contact with the boundary wall between the first storage portion 64c1 and the second storage portion 64d1 to cause a clogged ball, or the game ball is stored in the first distribution turning member 64a1 in the first storage. It is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the left or right without being accommodated in the portion 64c1 and the second accommodation portion d1.

  Further, the magnet 64b1 and the first base side magnet 900a1 repel, for example, so that the first storage portion 64c1 receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and moves the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1. It is possible to prevent the first sorting rotating member 64a1 from rotating rightward (the first housing portion 64c1 faces upward) after the guiding. Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first discharge guiding path 64z1, the second storage portion 64d1 is directed upward, and the game ball that has entered the first distribution prize device 64a1 is the second The storage portion 64d1 receives the first sorting rotating member 64a1 to the right by about 180 degrees from the state by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first guide path 64z2. In this way, the first distribution rotating member 64a1 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first discharge guide path 64z1 and the first guide path 64z2 and win the game.

  The second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are also configured by the same mechanism as the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are normally configured to rotate according to the weight of the game ball. As will be described later, the RAM erase switch 122 is operated to perform main control. In the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the apparatus 110, in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015), the distribution position adjustment motor 263 of the distribution winning apparatus 64 sets the first position to a predetermined initial position. The first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 rotate to predetermined initial positions (in this embodiment, the positions at which the game balls are respectively guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15). Moved and set. Here, the initial position is a position when the value of a distribution winning ball counter 203e, which will be described later, is 0 (a state where 0 or 256 gaming balls have entered the distribution winning device 64). “1” indicating that the first housing portion 64c1 of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is facing upward, and the second housing portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is facing upward. “0” indicating this, “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c3 of the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is facing upward, and the second accommodating portion 64d4 of the fourth distributing rotating member 64a4 “0” indicating the position facing upward, “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c5 of the fifth sorting rotating member 64a5 is facing upward, the sixth sorting rotating member At a position where the second accommodating portion 64d6 of 64a6 faces upward “0” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the seventh sorting rotating member 64a7 is in a position facing upward, and the first accommodating portion 64d8 of the eighth distributing rotating member 64a8. Is set to the initial position by setting “10101010” as continuous data.

  In addition, when the first distribution rotation member 64a1 distributes the game balls to the first guide path 64z2, the second distribution rotation member 64a2 transfers the game balls flowing down the first guide path 64z2 to the first storage portion 64c2. It receives in the 2nd accommodating part 64d2, and guides to the 2nd discharge guidance path 64z3 or the 2nd guidance path 64z4. As described above, the first distribution rotation member 64a1 to the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 rotate the eighth distribution rotation by continuously guiding the game balls from the first guide path 64z2 to the seventh guide path 64z14. A game ball reaches the member 64a8. When a game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 64c8 of the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 and distributed to the eighth guide path 64z16, the game ball flowing down the eighth guide path 64z16 is guided to the first start port 71. And enter.

  In a state in which the gaming machine is initialized, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 to the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 guide the gaming balls from the first discharge guiding path 64z1 to the eighth discharging guiding path 64z15, respectively. Placed in position.

  Specifically, the first, third, fifth, and seventh distribution rotating members 64a1, 64a3, 64a5, and 64a7 are located at positions where the first housing portions 64c1, 64c3, 64c5, and 64c7 face upward (the right side). The position rotated to the maximum angle in the direction) is set. On the other hand, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth distribution rotating members 64a2, 64a4, 64a6, and 64a8 are positions where the second housing portions 64d2, 64d4, 64d6, and 64d8 face the upper side of the gaming machine (maximum in the left direction). It is set in a state where it is rotated to an angle rotated position.

  Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance 640 from the initial state, the game ball that entered the first ball enters the first housing portion 64c1, and the first sorting rotation member 64a1 rotates to the left. Then, it is guided to the first discharge guiding path 64z1. As a result, the game balls are discharged to the sorting prize device 64 to the outside. At this time, the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is stopped at a position where the second accommodating portion 64d1 faces upward. Then, the second game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, and the first sorting rotation member 64a2 rotates to the right. The game balls are distributed to the first guide path 64z2. The game ball that has flowed down the first guiding path 64z2 enters the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2, and the second sorting rotating member 64a2 rotates rightward, and the second discharging guiding path 64z3. The game balls are distributed to each other.

  Next, the third game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the first accommodating portion 64c1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1 and is distributed to the first discharge guiding path 64z1. The game ball that has entered the fourth ball enters the second housing portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, is guided to the first guide path 64z2, and enters the first housing portion 64c2 of the second sorting rotation member 64a2. A game ball enters and is distributed to the second guide path 64z4. As described above, it is necessary for four game balls to enter the entrance 640 before the second distribution rotating member 64a2 distributes the game balls to the second guide path 64z4. Similarly, it is necessary for eight game balls to enter the entrance 640 until the third sorting rotation member 64a3 guides the game balls to the third guide path 64z6. Similarly, the fourth distribution rotating member 64a4 has 16 balls, the fifth distribution rotating member 64a5 has 32 balls, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 has 64 balls, the seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 has 128 balls, and the eighth vibration. In the minute rotation member 64a8, 256 balls are required to distribute the game balls from the fourth guide path 64z8 to the eighth guide path 64z16.

  That is, 256 game balls enter the distribution prize device 64 from the initial state of the distribution prize device 64 (0 game balls entered) until the game balls enter the first start port 71. Need to sphere. As will be described later, when a game ball enters the first start port 71, it is determined to be a big hit (all big hit random numbers are determined to be a big win), so once for 256 balls entered Is a configuration that always generates a big hit. By configuring in this way, the player can play a game for the purpose of causing more game balls to enter the distribution prize winning device 64, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored early. Can do.

  The first distribution rotation member 64a1 is provided with a rotation angle sensor 670a1 for detecting the stop position, and the first distribution rotation member 64a1 guides the game ball to the first discharge guide path 64z1 (first Main controller 110 whether the first storage portion 64c1 is facing upward) or a state in which a game ball is guided to the first guide path 64z2 (second storage portion 64d1 is facing upward). The MPU 201 can be detected. Similarly, a rotation angle sensor 670a2 is provided for the second distribution rotation member 64a2, a rotation angle sensor 670a3 is provided for the third distribution rotation member 64a3, and a rotation angle sensor 670a4 is provided for the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4. The distribution rotation member 64a5 has a rotation angle sensor 670a5, the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 has a rotation angle sensor 670a6, the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 has a rotation angle sensor 670a7, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Are provided with rotation angle sensors 670a8, respectively.

  The rotation angle sensors 670a1 to 670a8 constitute the distribution position confirmation sensor 262, and the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 connect the first housing portions 64c1 to 64c8 to the main controller 110. In the state of turning to the position facing upward of the machine 10 (position turned to the right), “1” indicating a positive rotation angle is output, and the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 are directed upward. In the state of being rotated to the facing position (position rotated to the left), “0” indicating a negative rotation angle is output.

  Note that the game ball guided to the first discharge guiding path 64z1 passes through the first discharge port 650a1, is discharged to the outside of the distribution winning device 64, and flows down the front of the game board 13 again. The first outlet 650a1 is composed of a gate-type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed, and is configured to be detectable by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. With the same configuration, the game ball guided to the second discharge guide path 64z3 is from the second discharge port 650a2, and the game ball guided to the third discharge guide path 64z5 is from the third discharge port 650a3 to the fourth discharge guide path. The game ball guided to 64z7 is from the fourth discharge port 650a4, the game ball guided to the fifth discharge guide path 64z9 is from the fifth discharge port 650a5, and the game ball guided to the sixth discharge guide path 64z11 is sixth. The game balls guided from the discharge port 650a6 to the seventh discharge guide path 64z13 are discharged from the seventh discharge port 650a7, and the game balls guided to the eighth discharge guide path 64z15 are discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  Since the game balls that have passed through the ball entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are respectively detected by the sensors, the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can grasp the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can recognize the number of game balls entering the allocation prize winning device 64 necessary until the next big hit. Therefore, when a game ball wins the first start port 71, whether the number of game balls that have entered the distribution start device 64 is the number that wins the first start port 71 (this implementation). In the embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is illegally awarded to the first starting port 71 by determining 256).

  Further, by grasping the number of game balls currently entering the distribution prize device 64, it is possible to recognize whether there is an illegally entered game ball. Specifically, for example, when a hole is made from the outside of the distribution prize winning device 64 and a game ball is entered from other than the passage port 640, the number of discharges is greater than the number of passages. Therefore, it is possible to recognize fraud.

  Furthermore, even when a problem occurs in which the game balls are clogged in the distribution winning device 64, there is a difference in the number of game balls that have passed through the ball entrance 640 and the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Since the notification is given when the number reaches a certain number (10 in the present embodiment), the clogged ball can be found at an early stage and the game store can eliminate the clogged ball.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is located at the lower right of the first sorting rotating member 64a1, and the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is located at the lower left of the second sorting rotating member 64a2. The fourth distribution rotation member 64a4 is located at the lower right of the third distribution rotation member 64a3, the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the lower left of the fourth distribution rotation member 64a4, and the fifth distribution rotation member 64a5 is located at the right. A sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is disposed below, a seventh distribution rotation member 64a7 is disposed at the lower left of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6, and an eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 is disposed at the lower right of the seventh distribution rotation member 64a7. By doing so, as compared with the configuration in which the sorting rotation members are arranged in the left direction or the right direction, the use of the space in the left-right direction can be suppressed, and the sorting and winning device 64 can be configured in a compact manner.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are arranged alternately (zigzag positions) as shown in FIG. 3, but arranged side by side in one direction in the left or right direction. Thus, when setting the initial position, the setting can be made by moving all the sorting rotating members in one direction, so that the initial position setting process can be facilitated.

  In the present embodiment, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and ten sorting rotating members may be arranged. You may comprise so that less than eight may be arrange | positioned. In this way, by changing the number of distribution rotating members, it is possible to change the number of game balls that are required until the first start port 71 wins, and to adjust the probability of obtaining a big hit. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of distribution rotation members can be adjusted in the game store side. Specifically, the distribution rotating member and the start port are configured to be removable, and the game store side attaches and sets it according to the circumstances, so that the game can be performed with the adjustment according to the convenience of the game store. be able to. Moreover, since it can be changed according to the day, it is possible to adjust the balance between the game store and the player so that the balance is appropriate by changing the sales.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting port 71, the random number value is set so that it is determined to be all winning, but not limited to this, the jackpot probability may be set as appropriate. Good.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the distribution prize device 64. 4 indicates the flow direction of the game ball guided to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16, and OUT indicates the game guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15. The flow direction of the sphere is shown.

  Although omitted in FIG. 3, as shown in FIG. 4, the first to eighth facing members 64 t <b> 1 to 64 t <b> 8 are provided on the facing surfaces of the first to eighth guide paths 64 z <b> 2 to 64 z <b> 16 of the distribution winning device 64. Each is provided. The first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8 are configured by wall portions protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Has been. Further, even when the game balls flowing down the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16 are strong, the game balls are guided by the first to eighth facing members 64t1 to 64t8, so that the game balls are moved to the first to eighth The problem of being discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 without being guided to the sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the right side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. As will be described later, in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% (no random number value determined to be a win is set). On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the winning probability is set to 100% (all random values are determined to be winning).

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol winning probability is set to 0% in the normal gaming state (non-temporary time), but this is not restrictive, and the winning probability (with a low probability of winning is not limited). For example, it may be configured to be set to 1/1000. Here, in the normal gaming state, a game ball is fired to the right side of the game area, that is, the right side (a game method in which the normal symbol starting port 67 is made to win a game ball in order to win the normal symbol). It is not necessary to set the probability to be advantageous to the player by being performed.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory is activated, and the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, which is normally maintained in the upright state, are substantially V to V. It moves in the shape of a letter (inverted C shape) and the game balls are guided by the blades 300a and 300b, so that the game balls can be easily entered for a predetermined time (3 s in this embodiment). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose variation display has not been executed among the balls won in the normal symbol starting port 67, by a lighting state. The number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left and right 7-segment LEDs, a special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game based on the winning of the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is variably displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the center of 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) has elapsed, which is determined based on the winning at the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. The segment is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center one segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “33” and “77” corresponding to the win is displayed. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, it is always determined that the game is a big win (the values of all the random symbols C1 per special symbol are determined to be a big win). Therefore, the design of the special symbol is started and stopped, and the symbol displayed as a big hit is a symbol.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 71 or the second start port 300, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery) is determined, and the type of the big hit is also determined. Do. As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot type determined here is jackpot A (100 times of the 16R jackpot normal symbol short time period, that is, the jackpot with a short time), jackpot B (16R jackpot normal symbol of the short time period 0 times, In other words, a big hit without a short time) is prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, “77” is displayed for jackpot A and “33” is displayed for jackpot B, for example).

  Here, the “big hit A” is a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and after the big hit, the game shifts to a short-time gaming state, which will be described later. At this time, in the short game state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the probability of being determined to be a win is 0% (no random number determined to be a win) to 100% (all random values are hit). To be determined) and set. The short-time gaming state is continuously executed until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100, and when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100, the normal game state is entered. Here, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the probability that it is determined to be a win is set to 0%.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a special symbol (third symbol) while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37 using a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 as a trigger. ), A third symbol display device 81 is provided which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”).

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are special symbols. Displayed as one of the following. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol similar to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a pseudo symbol. Although the pseudo symbol will be described later, a variation of the pseudo symbol is displayed in a predetermined variation pattern based on the fact that a game similar to the special symbol has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation prize winning device 64. Done. In the case of the special symbol variable display, the special symbol variable display is started also in the first symbol display device 37, but for the pseudo symbol, the pseudo symbol variable display is performed only by the third symbol display device 81. .

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 71 or the second start opening 300, it is determined that all are winning, and therefore, as a special symbol variation pattern, the first start opening 71 is won. In this case, a variation pattern that is a big hit for each of the second start port 300 is set.

  FIG. 11A shows a variation pattern of a special symbol selected based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first start port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed a certain normal special fluctuation pattern. When the game symbol is won at the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not being displayed, the left, middle and right symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) are looped (1 → 2 →・ →→ 9 → 1) The display of fluctuation is started at high speed in ascending order. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is variably displayed at a low speed. When reaching the reach state, the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the characters “heaven reach!” Are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that a game ball has won is displayed at the first start port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, if a game ball wins the first start opening 71, the game machine will always be a big hit, so the player recognizes that if the first start opening 71 wins, the player will win a big hit. . For this reason, the player is directly connected to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in this embodiment) that the game ball will win at the first start port 71 enters the distribution prize winning device 64. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls necessary to win the first starting port 71 have entered the allocation winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the characters “arrival in heaven !!”. Can be recognized as a big hit.

  FIG. 11 (b) shows a variation in the ceiling variation pattern selected when the number of game balls that have entered the allocation prize winning device 64 is 256 out of the pseudo symbol variation patterns shown in FIG. 10 (a). It is the figure shown about the special variation pattern of a ceiling which is a variation pattern of a special symbol selected when a game ball wins in the 1st starting slot 71 and a variation display of a special symbol is started when it is displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the pseudo-pattern ceiling fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in this embodiment) start to be displayed at high speed in ascending order (see FIG. 11B). Not shown). Next, the left and right pseudo-symbols of the same number (in the upper part of FIG. 11B, the left and right pseudo-symbols stop at “7”) are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Is done. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and the closed door symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 11 (b), when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started in the ceiling special variation pattern, the pseudo displayed on the upper left is displayed. The symbol is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and a diagram in which the closed door is opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made.

  This ceiling variation pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first entry port 71 after entering the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 (the time set at the time of design). The variable time is set in. Therefore, since the game ball will win the first start port 71 when the variation time ends after the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern is started, the replacement to the special symbol is performed smoothly, It can prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to identify whether the variation is a variation of the pseudo symbol or the variation of the special symbol, and the variation of the pseudo symbol based on the entrance to the entrance 640 that does not win the first starting port 71. Even with the display, it is possible to have an expectation for a big hit (winning the first starting port 71).

  Further, when switching from the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern to the ceiling special variation pattern of the special symbol, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed, and then the variation display of the ceiling special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to start.

  FIG. 12 shows a special symbol selected when a game ball is won at the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed with a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern on the third symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the switching special fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 12, when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern, if a game ball wins the first starting port 71, the switching is performed as shown in the diagram of FIG. By starting the variation display of the special symbol in the special variation pattern, the pseudo symbol that has been variably displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed for a moment. Thereafter, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in a “reach state” in which they are stopped and displayed, and the characters “arrival in heaven!” Are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol “777” is stopped and displayed to notify the player that the player has won a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a big win, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not used. Can be made. Further, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste and to focus on the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. The first start port 71 and the second start port 300 are also one of the winning ports from which three balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery related to the big win of the lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a big win, the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which a ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type, and both jackpot A and jackpot B can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating winning based on winning in the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300, the variable winning device 65 is based on the jackpot type. The opening / closing operation is set, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63, 65 a, 71, 300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 5, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 5 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores various data and control programs for executing these processes, and the RAM 203 has a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Is provided.

  Here, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a random number table 202a per special symbol, a special hit type table 202b, a random number table 202c per ordinary symbol, a variation pattern table 202d for jackpots, a variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e, for ordinary symbols At least a stop type command 202f, arrival average number of seconds data 202g, distribution initial position data 202h, distribution accessory position data 202i, and ceiling arrival frequency data 202j are set (stored).

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol random number table 202a receives the value of the random symbol counter C1 per special symbol acquired when a game ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300. It is a data table in which random values determined to be stored are stored. In the present embodiment, all the special symbol random number counters C1 values (0 to 109) are stored in the special symbol random number table 202a as random numbers determined to be successful. In the present embodiment, the setting is made so that all the random number values are determined to be wins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a random number value determined to be a win may be set as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the special hit type table 202b is a table for determining the type of jackpot to be executed when a big hit is made in a lottery game lottery. In the present embodiment, after the 16R jackpot is executed, the jackpot A in which the short-time gaming state is set and the jackpot B in which the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state) is set after the 16R jackpot is executed are set. ing. If the value of the special hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) acquired when a game ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is “0 to 79”, the big hit A is set ( If it is “80 to 99”, the special hit type table 202b is set so that the big hit B is set (determined).

  As shown in FIG. 8C, the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol stores the random number value of the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol determined to be a hit in the normal gaming state (non-short game state) and the short-time gaming state. This is a data table. In the present embodiment, no random value that is determined to be a winning is set in the normal gaming state. That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that all the random symbol counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 are out of place. In the short-time gaming state, all random numbers are set in the normal symbol random number table 202c as random numbers determined to be winning. That is, in the short-time gaming state, it is determined that all the random symbol counters C4 (0 to 99) per normal symbol acquired based on the winning of the game ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 are hit.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d stores a variation display mode (dynamic display mode) for winning a special symbol. In the present embodiment, when game balls win at the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, all wins and there is no case of losing, so only a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) for big hits is set. ing. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, dedicated jackpot variation patterns are set for the winnings of the first start port 71 and the second start port 300, respectively.

  The jackpot variation pattern for winning at the first start port 71 is selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in the normal special variation pattern or the ceiling variation pattern selected when the variation of the pseudo symbol is stopped. A switching special variation pattern that is selected when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a special variation pattern other than the ceiling special variation pattern and the ceiling variation pattern is set.

  As a jackpot variation pattern for winning at the second starting port 300, a short time special variation pattern is set. The short-time special variation pattern is configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, and a configuration in which a predetermined symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is suddenly displayed in a state where all the symbols are aligned and is notified that a big hit has been made. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the short-time game state can be shortened, and the player can suppress getting bored with the game early because the jackpots are generated at short intervals. Further, the game store side can shorten the time during the short game when the game ball is not consumed, and can increase sales.

  The variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e is a variation pattern table in which the variation display mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is stored. When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “○” and “×” are displayed. After the symbols are turned on alternately for a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), a normal symbol (“○” or “×” symbol in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). . If a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variation patterns of normal symbols are set in the variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202e. Both the hit variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern are set with a variation time of 3 seconds. As described above, since the variation time of the normal symbol is composed of a short variation time, the time-short gaming state can be further shortened. Therefore, the player can play more lottery games by efficiently using the game time. In addition, more sales can be made for the game store.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202f stores a command corresponding to a normal symbol hit / miss stop type.

  The average arrival time data 202g is the average number of seconds data calculated at the time of designing the time required for a game ball to enter the first start port 71 after the game ball has entered the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. It is remembered. In the present embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is stored as “5 to 7 seconds”.

  In this embodiment, the arrival average number of seconds is configured to be set in advance based on the design value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball may be entered from the ball opening 640 and the arrival average number of seconds may be set based on the time required to enter the game, or each time the first start opening 71 is won. It is also possible to configure so that the number of seconds to reach is measured and the average number of seconds is updated each time. By configuring in this way, even when the arrival seconds differ for each gaming machine due to the difference in accuracy of the members constituting the distribution winning device 64, the accurate arrival seconds can be set. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify whether or not fraud has been performed.

  Further, as described above, when the arrival average seconds are measured and set for each pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the pseudo ceiling fluctuation pattern is determined based on the arrival average seconds that are measured and set. Etc. may be set. By configuring in this way, switching from the pseudo symbol to the special symbol can be performed smoothly and naturally, so that the player can be prevented from feeling more uncomfortable.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 flow down the upper surface of the game board 13 and are discharged from the out port 66. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a common guide path through which game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 flow down may be provided to guide to the general winning port. When a game ball enters the general winning opening, for example, a configuration in which prize balls such as three balls are paid out to the player may be used. With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 can perform the effect of whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 enters the general entrance or the first start port 71. It is possible to improve the game preference. Also, the base of the pachinko machine 10 (the difference between the game ball that has been launched and the game ball that has been paid out) until the prize is awarded to the first start port 71 by playing a prize in the general prize opening and paying out the prize ball. It can be adjusted so that it is not too disadvantageous for the player (the player's investment amount becomes too large).

  The distribution initial position data 202h stores the initial positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. The initial position here stores the positions at which the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game balls to the first to eighth discharge guiding paths 64z1 to 64z15, respectively. The distribution initial position data 202h is assigned to the distribution winning device 64 in the distribution position initialization process (FIG. 25, S1015) executed in the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on. Used when initializing.

  The allocated character position data 202i corresponds to the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning device 64 (value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e). The positions of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 (the positions where the first accommodating portions 64c1 to 64c8 face upward or the positions where the second accommodating portions 64d1 to 64d8 face upward) are stored.

  Specifically, if the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 0 (the state where 0 or 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64), the first distribution rotating member 64a1 has the first value. “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c1 is facing upward, “0” indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d2 of the second sorting rotating member 64a2 is facing upward, “1” indicating that the first housing portion 64c3 of the third sorting rotating member 64a3 is facing upward, and the second housing portion 64d4 of the fourth sorting rotating member 64a4 is facing upward. “0” indicating that the first receiving portion 64c5 of the fifth sorting rotating member 64a5 is in a position facing upward, and the second receiving portion 64d6 of the sixth distributing rotating member 64a6 “0” indicating that the position is facing upward, the seventh vibration “1” indicating that the first accommodating portion 64c7 of the rotating member 64a7 is facing upward, and indicating that the first accommodating portion 64d8 of the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 is facing upward. “10101010” is set as data in which “0” is continuous. Note that “10101010” is set in the above-described distribution initial position data 202h.

  If the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 1 (one game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64), the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first distribution rotating member 64a1 faces upward. Since it moves to the position, “00101010” changed to “0” indicating that the second accommodating portion 64d1 of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is directed upward is set.

  As described above, the position to the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at the time when the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64 is converted into data in the sorting role position data 202i. And stored as data tables. In this distributed character position data 202i, the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is “0 to 255” (0 to 255 balls have been entered into the sorting winning device 64 (the state where 256 balls have been entered is 0). It is set corresponding to each value up to))).

  The positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected by the output value of the distribution position confirmation sensor 262. The distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of each of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8. The positions where the magnets 64b1 to b8 face the game machine vertically upward are set to 0 degrees. When the magnets 64b1 to b8 are rotated to the right, the position is set to a positive value. When the magnets 64b1 to b8 are rotated to the left, the position is set to a negative value. . Therefore, if the value of the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 is a positive value, it is determined that the first storage parts 64c1 to 8c are facing upward (the data of the sorting tool position data 202i is “1”). Determined). On the other hand, if the value of the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 is a negative value, it is determined that the second storage portions 64d1-8 are facing upward (the data of the sorting tool position data 202i is “0”). Determined).

  The number-of-arrival-ceiling data 202j stores the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e from the initial state until the gaming ball wins the first starting port 71 from the initial state. That is, the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 necessary for winning the game balls at the first start port 71 is stored. The ceiling arrival frequency data 202j is provided for recognizing the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e necessary until the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 wins the first start port 71. In the present embodiment, when 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64, the 256th game ball wins the first start port 71, that is, the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 255. 1 is added to 1 and updated to 0, the value of the allocated winning ball counter 203e is 0 (not including 0 set by initialization) in the ceiling arrival count data 202j. Is set. That is, the value obtained by adding 1 from 255 to the number-of-winning winning ball counter 203e and updating it to 0 corresponds to the ceiling arrival frequency data 202j.

  In the present embodiment, the ceiling arrival number 202j is set in advance. However, when the distributed winning ball counter 203e is incremented by 1 from 255 and updated to 0, the 256th is distributed. A ceiling arrival flag indicating that the player has entered the winning device 64 may be set and turned on.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a special symbol random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 is used. Further, a random symbol per normal symbol C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the random symbol per normal symbol C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol execution area 203a in which each counter value is stored for winning for the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. Also, when the special symbol is changing, each counter value is not acquired, and only the winning ball (three game balls in this embodiment) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, with respect to the winning of the first starting opening 71 or the second starting opening 300, the setting as a holding ball is not provided when a winning is made during the change of the special symbol, but not limited thereto. , You may set the reserve ball with or without the upper limit.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The random number counter C1 per special symbol is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 109 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 109). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the random number counter C1 per special symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C1 per special symbol. That is, for example, when the random counter C1 per special symbol is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 109, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27).

  The value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203c1 corresponding to the winning start opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the random number table 202a per special symbol (FIG. 8B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is the value per special symbol. A jackpot is determined when it matches the value of a random jackpot set in the random number table 202a (in this embodiment, “0 to 109”).

  The random symbol counter C1 per special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-109. In this special symbol random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hit values) that are jackpots is 110, and “0 to 109” is stored in the special symbol random number table 202a. That is, the values of all the special symbol random number counters C1 are determined to be big hits.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment). After reaching the value, it returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the ball wins the first starting port 71 or the second starting port 300 (starting winning). At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a of the RAM 203.

  The value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Based on the special hit type counter C2 and the special hit type table 202b (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202, the big hit type is determined. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, as described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, “short jackpot A” in which the short-time gaming state is set after the jackpot game, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds There is a “big hit B” in which a normal gaming state (non-temporary gaming state) is set after the game.

  In the special hit type table 202b, the value of the special hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is associated with each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, the value “0 to 79” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A, and the value “80 to 99” of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot B. ing.

  When the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a value that is a big hit (in this embodiment, all values are set to values that become a big hit), the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is stored. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is determined from the special hit type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “20”, the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “80”, the jackpot B is determined as the jackpot type. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the special hit type table 202b is defined so that the jackpot A is selected with a probability of about 80% when the jackpot is hit, and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 20%. Yes.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 6) of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the random symbol counter C4 per normal symbol. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number that is the winning set by the normal symbol random number table 202c.

  Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (through gate). The The number of random number values determined to be winning is 0 in the normal gaming state, that is, the normal symbol is not winning in the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state). In the short-time gaming state, the number is 100, and the range is “0 to 99”, that is, since it is determined that all random numbers are hit, the normal design starting port 67 is inserted into the game ball. If it passes, it will be a winning structure. When it is determined that it is a win, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are displayed in the short-time game. In the state, the operation of releasing for a predetermined time (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed once (in the normal game state, since the normal symbol is not set, all the symbols are removed). The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 99), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (FIG. 27, S1200).

  When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, when the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment). Are stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203b for the number of holdings (normal symbol holdings 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the random number counter C4 for normal symbols. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON, and the variable symbol display based on the random number value is stopped or held. If the data is shifted to the previous reserved area due to digestion, the data is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area which is newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether the data is stored in the reserved area or whether the normal symbol is variably displayed is determined depending on which reserved area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 includes a special symbol execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a short and medium counter 203d, a distributed winning ball number counter 203e, a distributed discharging ball number counter 203f, and a distributed winning timer. 203g, distribution prize flag 203h, and other memory area 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting to display the special symbol in a variable manner. This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired when a game ball wins the starting opening 300. Each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is cleared (erased) to 0 when the special symbol stops changing.

  Specifically, the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203a stores the values of the random number counter C1 per special symbol and the special hit type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning prize. The When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 71 during the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), each value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol and the special type counter C2 from the counter buffer Are stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203a. When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing for starting the execution of the variation effect (the data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a while the special symbol is stopped), the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 37, or the third symbol Processing such as display setting of the display device 81 is executed.

  When each value of the counters C1 to C3 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a, the MPU 201 stores the data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a as a special symbol described later. With reference to the variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per normal symbol acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of a start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the counter random number counter C4 from the counter buffer is detected from the counter buffer. Is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol flag provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag) can be stored (held) up to four times. . In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing to the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning prize) are sequentially from the holding area with the fastest order of digestion in the holding area where the data is vacant ( A reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved balls) is stored.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variable display effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the ball storage area 203b (value of the normal random number counter C4), data corresponding to one start winning is provided in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Shift to the normal symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c passes the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”). The number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed on the second symbol display device 83) based on the It is a counter for counting. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 24, S1014). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S805 in FIG. 21).

  The hour / medium counter 203d is a counter area in which the number of hour / hours 100 is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A is executed. When the time reduction count is set, until the time reduction count is set to 0, the normal symbol random number table for the short symbol gaming state is set in the normal symbol random number table 202c. Further, when the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the operation of opening the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory in the opening time (1 s in this embodiment). Is executed once.

  The hour / short counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol stops variably displaying. When the hour / hour counter 203d becomes 0, the state shifts from the hour / short gaming state to the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol per random symbol 202c A random number table per normal symbol for the normal gaming state (non-short game state) is set.

  The distribution winning ball counter 203e is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a game ball wins a ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. In the state in which the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the distribution winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later. If it is determined, 1 is added. It is initialized to 0 when the jackpot game is started.

  The distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is a counter that is incremented by one each time a game ball passes through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64. In the state in which the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to 0, and in the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, the game balls are first to eighth discharge ports. When it is determined that any one of 650a1 to 650a8 has been passed, 1 is added. Note that, based on the start of the jackpot game, the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is initialized.

  In the present embodiment, the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is configured to count the number of game balls discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. When winning a prize, 1 may be added, and when the game ball is discharged from any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8, the count value may be decremented by one. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls being won in the distribution winning device 64.

  When the game ball passes through the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the distribution winning timer 203g adds the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e to the set counter value (in this embodiment, 1 is added from 255). If it is updated 0), it is a timer for measuring the flow time of the game ball. That is, the value of the distribution prize counter 203e is 0 updated by adding 1 from 255. This means that the 256th game ball has entered, so after entering the entrance 640. The time until entering the first start port 71 is measured.

  When the game ball passes through the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is set to 0 and the start of measurement is set. In the distribution error process (S1207 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, 1 is added if the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero.

  The distribution winning flag 203h is a flag indicating that the 256th game ball (the distribution winning ball number counter 203e) has entered the distribution winning device 64. Specifically, the distribution winning flag 203g is a distribution winning ball when the game ball passes through the entrance 640 in the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the value of the number counter 203e is the set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255), that is, the 256th game ball has entered the distribution prize device 64. If set to ON. Further, in the start winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 20, S107), when a game ball enters the first start port 71, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to OFF. Is done. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the distribution winning flag 203h is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 203i is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, when it is determined that the 256th game ball, which is the number of game balls to be awarded to the first start port 71, has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, the game ball is Since the flow-down time until winning at the first starting port 71 is measured, if the game ball wins the first starting port 71 in a time longer or shorter than a time expected in advance by design, fraud It is possible to suppress fraud by determining that there is a possibility of being performed and notifying an error or the like.

  If it is determined that the number of game balls (256 balls in the present embodiment) that will win the first start port 71 has entered the distribution winning device 64, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By setting to, it becomes possible to determine in advance that the first start opening 71 is won and to execute control, and when the first start opening 71 wins, the distribution winning flag 203h is turned on. By determining whether or not the distribution winning flag 203h is off, if a winning occurs at the first starting port 71, an error or the like is notified, thereby causing the first starting port 71 due to fraud. The winning prize can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, at least a pseudo fluctuation table 222a and a background selection table 222b are set. Although not shown, the ROM 222 also stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, fixed value data, and the like.

  In the pseudo fluctuation table 222a, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), the fluctuation pattern for variably displaying the pseudo symbols on the third symbol display device 81 is the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d and the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a. Are stored in correspondence with each other value. As the types of fluctuation patterns, a normal deviation fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach A fluctuation pattern, a super reach B fluctuation pattern, a precursor fluctuation pattern, and a ceiling fluctuation pattern are set.

  In the normal deviation variation pattern, numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a line on the left, middle, and right, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in ascending order for a predetermined time (for example, 2 Second), the display is stopped and displayed with different numbers (for example, “456”, etc.) in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The variation time from the start of variation until all pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed is 3 seconds.

  In the normal reach variation pattern, three symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle and right, and for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), After the pseudo symbols change in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “REACH” is output from the audio output device 226 to reach the reach state. After that, the middle symbols are displayed at a low speed and displayed in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed with a symbol (for example, “757” etc.) different from the left and right symbols. The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 10 seconds.

  In the Super Reach A variation pattern, three symbols 1 to 9 which are one of the pseudo symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side in the left, middle and right, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols are displayed in a changing manner in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped by the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “Leach” is output from the audio output device 226. After reaching the reach state, a character (for example, a girl in a swimsuit with a polka dot pattern) different from the number pseudo-pattern is displayed. The middle symbols and symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed together with the character, and the girl stops the numeric symbols and stops at a numeric symbol different from the left and right symbols (for example, “757”). The fluctuation time from the start of the numerical symbol display to the stop display of all the numeric symbols is 15 seconds.

  The super reach B variation pattern differs from the super reach A variation pattern in the girl's swimsuit as a displayed character. Specifically, a girl wearing a red swimsuit is displayed. For other points, the same variable display as in Super Reach A is performed.

  The predictive reach variation pattern is a number of 1-9 symbol designs, which are one of the pseudo symbols, displayed on the third symbol display device 81 side by side on the left, middle, and right, for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols fluctuate and display in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226 to reach After entering the state, the text “A little more to heaven!” Is displayed. The middle symbol is displayed at low speed and fluctuating in ascending order. Thereafter, the display is stopped and displayed with a symbol (for example, “757” etc.) different from the left and right symbols. The variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display of all the pseudo symbols is 20 seconds. In this way, by displaying the characters “a little more to the heavens!”, The player can count the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 to win the first start port 71. You can recognize that you are approaching.

  This predictor variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected only when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d is “201 to 254”. Therefore, the value of the player's follow-up winning game number counter 223d It is also a variation pattern for informing (value range).

  As for the ceiling variation pattern, the numerical symbols 1 to 9, which are one of the pseudo symbols, are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a horizontal row on the left, middle, and right, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). After the pseudo symbols change and display in ascending order at high speed, the left symbol and the right symbol stop changing with the same number (for example, “7”), and then the voice “REACH” is output from the audio output device 226. After reaching the reach state, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the three numeric symbols are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, and a picture of the closed door is displayed. . Until the picture of the closed door is displayed, it is composed of a fluctuation time of 6 seconds, and the middle symbol is variably displayed at a high speed.

  The ceiling variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball number counter 223d is 255, and is selected when a game ball is to be won at the first start port 71. That is, the ceiling variation pattern is configured in a variation manner that is connected to the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, in order to link with the variation of the special symbol, the average time required for the game ball to pass through the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 and win the first start port 71 is 5 seconds to 7 seconds. It consists of a 6 second variation time within the second range. Thereby, when a game ball wins the 1st starting opening 71, it can switch to the change display of a special symbol smoothly, and it can control giving a player a sense of incongruity. Moreover, it can switch more smoothly by setting it as the intermediate | middle time of average time.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d increases, it is difficult to select the normal deviation variation pattern (the number of values assigned to the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is small). Yes. Further, if the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is large (for example, “201 to 254”), the super reach A variation pattern is easily selected (the number of values assigned to the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is large). ) Is configured as follows. Accordingly, if the frequency of displaying the super reach A variation pattern increases, the number of game balls won in the distribution winning device 64 may be close to the number that will be won in the first start port 71. Can make people expect. Further, when the game is started, it is not known what the state of the distribution winning device 64 (the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8) is. I am interested in how much a game ball must be awarded to the entrance 640 of the sorting prize-winning device 64 before winning a prize. Here, the selection rate is changed in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64 (the value of the secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d) as the type of the variation pattern that is variably displayed with the pseudo symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the number of balls entered into the current distribution winning device 64. Therefore, the player can be interested in even the pseudo-pattern variation pattern selected regardless of the jackpot determination, and can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the background selection table 222b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d and the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a. Multiple background images are set. As background image types, a normal background, a precursor A background, a precursor B background, and a precursor C background are set.

  The normal background is a blue background image (not shown). As shown in FIG. 13C, the precursor A background is a background image indicating “sunny” in which a sun symbol is displayed on the upper right on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13D, the precursor B background is a background image indicating “cloudy” in which white clouds are displayed on a normal blue background. As shown in FIG. 13E, the precursor C background is a background image showing a “storm” in which a black rain cloud is displayed on a normal blue background and a rain is displayed from the rain cloud.

  When the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d is increased, the proportion of the precursor A background is reduced, and the proportion of the precursor B background and the precursor C background is increased. In addition, when the value of the follower distribution winning ball number counter 223d is 255 (that is, the number of winning balls (256 in this embodiment) that will be awarded to the first starting port 71 in the distribution winning device 64). When the ball enters), the precursor C background is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a.

  Specifically, when the value of the follow-up winning prize winning number counter 223d is “0 to 60”, of the 199 values of the pseudo selection counter 223a, 30 are the precursor A background and 19 are the precursor B background, 9 are assigned to the precursor C background. Similarly, when the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball number counter 223d is “61 to 149”, 25 are assigned to the precursor A background, 24 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 9 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is “150 to 200”, 10 are assigned to the precursor A background, 29 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 19 are assigned to the precursor C background. When the value of the follow-up allocation winning ball counter 223d is “201 to 254”, 6 are assigned to the precursor A background, 33 are assigned to the precursor B background, and 29 are assigned to the precursor C background.

  Thus, when the value approaches “255”, which is the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won at the first starting port 71, the precursor B background and the precursor C background are selected. A large percentage is set. Further, when the value of the follow-up distribution winning ball counter 223a indicating the number of balls to be won at the first starting port 71 is “255”, the precursor C background is selected. When a game ball wins at the start port 71, the sign C background is often displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player will play a game with the expectation that he will win the first starting port 71 when the precursor C background is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the precursor B background or the precursor C background is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player receives the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 at the first start port 71. A game can be performed with the expectation that it will be close to the number of balls to be won (256 in this embodiment). In addition, since the selection ratio of the background type selected by the number of balls entered into the distribution winning device 64 is changed and set, the number of balls entered into the current sorting device 64 depending on the type of background image selected. Can be enjoyed by the player. Therefore, even if the number of balls entered into the allocation prize-winning device 64 is actually 50, when the precursor C background is selected and displayed, the player is not close to 256 balls. The game can be continued with expectation. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Note that the background image selection will be described later. In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the number of balls that have entered (remaining) the distribution winning device 64 is determined. When the value of the pay-in prize counter 223f shown is greater than 3, the background image is selected, and the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the selected background image.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a, a fluctuation start flag 223b, a stop type selection flag 223c, a follower-dispensed ball number counter 223e, a pay-in prize counter 223f, and other memory areas 223g. ing.

  The pseudo variation selection counter 223a is a counter that is used when a pseudo pattern variation pattern is selected from the pseudo variation table 222a or a background image is selected from the background selection table 222b. The pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is a counter value composed of values ranging from 0 to 198, and is updated by adding one by one in the main process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When 1 is added to the upper limit “198”, the value is updated to 0, which is the initial value. When the power is turned on, the initial value is set to 0.

  The variation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that a variation pattern command of a special symbol has been received from the main controller 110. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received in the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. Is set to ON. Further, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, it is set to OFF.

  The stop type selection flag 223c is a flag indicating that a stop type command output from the main controller 110 has been received. When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to off. In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the stop type command output from the main control device 110 has been received, the stop type selection flag 223c is turned on. Is set. Further, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d is a counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64. When the secondary allocation winning ball counter 223d receives the allocation winning ball number command output from the main controller 110, it is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, if the allocation winning ball number command is a value indicating 0, the value obtained by subtracting 1 is 255. That is, the value “0-255” of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d corresponds to the number of game balls entered into the sort prize-winning device 64 from 1 to 256 respectively (follow-up win prize counter 223d. 0 corresponds to 1). When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and in the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the number of prize-winning balls output by the main control device 110. By receiving the command, the value is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the allocated winning ball counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Note that the various data stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is backed up for a predetermined period by a backup power supply when a power interruption occurs.

  The secondary allocation discharge ball counter 223e is a counter that indicates the number of game balls that have been discharged from the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 when the game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 are discharged. When receiving the distributed discharge ball number command 223e output from the main control device 110, the secondary distribution discharge ball number counter 223e is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the command. Here, when the distribution discharge number command is a command indicating 0, 255 is obtained when 1 is subtracted. In other words, the value “0 to 255” of the follow-up dispensed ball number counter 223e corresponds to the number of game balls discharged from the sort winning device 64 from 1 to 256, respectively (in the assigned discharge ball number counter 223e). A value of 0 corresponds to 1). When the gaming machine is turned on, it is set to 0, and the number of allocated balls output by the main controller 110 in the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113. By receiving the command, it is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the sorted discharge ball number counter 203f stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The pay-in-win counter 223f is a counter that indicates the number of game balls that have entered (remained in) the distribution prize device 64. In the command determination process (S1614 in FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the pay-in-progress counter 223f is incremented by 1 when receiving the distributed winning ball number command output from the main control device 110. When a minute discharge ball number command is received, 1 is subtracted. Therefore, when there is a game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 64, the counter value indicates the number, and when there is no game ball in the distribution winning device 64, the counter value becomes zero. Yes. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is used to determine whether or not to change the background in the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is 4 or more (a value greater than 3), and if it is 4 or more, the process of changing the background is executed.

  The other memory area 223g is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 backs up to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 35. The processing of the MPU 201 is broadly divided into a startup process (FIG. 24) activated upon power-on, a main process (FIG. 27, S1200) executed after the startup process, and periodically (this embodiment). In FIG. 14, there is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23) activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process (FIG. 24) and the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and is cleared to 0 when the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (109 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and when the counter value is incremented by 1 to the upper limit value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the random number counter C1 per special symbol, the special type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special symbol random number counter C1, the special bonus type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, respectively). , 109, 99, 100, 99), each is cleared to 0. When the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the normal number The initial value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is read, and the initial value is set in the random number counter C1 per special symbol or the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a special symbol (third symbol) variation pattern or the like by the first symbol display device 37 for displaying a special symbol or the special symbol (third symbol) variation pattern by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). ). Next, a distribution winning process associated with entering the distribution winning apparatus 64 is executed (S105), and an allocation discharging process accompanying discharging of the game balls from the distribution winning apparatus 64 is executed (S106). Next, a start winning process associated with winning a prize at the first start port 71 or the second start port 300 is executed (S107). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, details of the distribution winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and details of the distribution discharge process (S106) will be described. The details of the start winning process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S107) is executed, a normal symbol variation process which is a variation process of the normal symbol with respect to the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol start port 67 is executed (S108), and then the normal symbol start port 67 is performed. A through gate process is executed for the game ball passing through (S109). Details of the normal symbol variation processing (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the through gate processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for executing control relating to the launch of the game ball is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the firing control process (S110), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol fluctuation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the counter values obtained from the special symbols, and the first symbol display device 37 in the variation display mode determined by predetermined control. And the 3rd symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to enable variable display (dynamic display) at the same time, or to stop display in a display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202).

  If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202, No), it is determined whether new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203). If it is determined that new data is not stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), a special symbol variation start process is executed (S204). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  The special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S204) will be described in detail later, but jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing are executed based on various data newly stored in the special symbol execution area 203a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), the special symbol is set to a fluctuation pattern (dynamic variation display mode) in which the special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic display). It is determined whether the variation time has elapsed (S205). If it is determined that the time is before the change time (S205: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S104: Yes), the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S206).

  Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a big hit (S207). If it is determined that the current lottery result is out (S207: No), this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since all of the special symbol changes are jackpots, the process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot may be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S207: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A or a jackpot B (S208). Here, the determination of the jackpot type is made by the special hit type table 202b shown in FIG. 9 based on the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2. When it is determined that the jackpot is A, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203d (S209). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is B, 0 is set to the hour / medium counter 203d (S210). Various settings (for example, the number of rounds, etc.) relating to the start of the jackpot game are set (S211). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S104), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S204).

  In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), first, a sorting apparatus error notification control process is executed (S301). The distribution device error notification control process (S301) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 17, but based on the current value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, The positions of the eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined, the positions are compared with the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, and if it is determined that they do not match, an error notification process is executed. It is a process to do.

  Data stored in the special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S302). Based on the special symbol random number table 202a, the jackpot determination is executed for the acquired value of the special symbol random counter C1 (S303). It is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result executed in the process of S303 is a jackpot (S304). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S304: YES), the display mode (LED display mode) on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot is set (S305). A jackpot variation pattern for variably displaying the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is selected (determined) (S306).

Here, as the jackpot variation pattern, as the jackpot variation pattern selected based on winning at the first start port 71, a normal special variation pattern and a ceiling variation pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. A special ceiling change pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a switching special change pattern selected when the pseudo symbol is displayed in a variable manner other than the ceiling change pattern. In addition, a short-time special variation pattern is set as a variation pattern selected based on winning of the second start opening 300.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the normal special variation pattern is that the left, middle, and right symbols (in this embodiment) when a game ball wins the first starting port 71 when the pseudo symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. , 1 to 9) are displayed in a loop (1 → 2 →... → 9 → 1) in ascending order at high speed. Then, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 11 (a), the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, the reach state is reached, and only the middle symbol is variably displayed at a low speed. When reaching the reach state, the voice “reach” is output from the audio output device 226. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the characters “heaven reach!” Are displayed below the area where the special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and the player has 256 balls. Enters the distribution winning device 64, and a notification indicating that a game ball has won is displayed at the first start port 71. Thereafter, for example, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won a big hit. In the present embodiment, if a game ball wins the first start opening 71, the game machine will always be a big hit, so the player recognizes that if the first start opening 71 wins, the player will win a big hit. . For this reason, the player is directly connected to the jackpot that the number of balls (256 balls in this embodiment) that the game ball will win at the first start port 71 enters the distribution prize winning device 64. Understand and play games. Therefore, it is understood that the number of game balls necessary to win the first starting port 71 have entered the allocation winning device 64 at an early stage by displaying the characters “arrival in heaven !!”. Can be recognized as a big hit. Note that the variation time of the normal special variation pattern is set to 15 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the game ball is won at the first start port 71 and the special symbol variation display is started with the ceiling special variation pattern, the ceiling special variation pattern is displayed. The pseudo symbol displayed at the upper left is replaced as a special symbol as it is, and a diagram with the closed door opened is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 11 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. The ceiling special variation pattern is set with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  The ceiling fluctuation pattern is the same time as the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance 71 after the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution prize-winning device 64 (the time set at the time of design). A variable time is set. Therefore, since the game ball will win the first start port 71 when the variation time ends after the variation display of the ceiling variation pattern is started, the replacement to the special symbol is performed smoothly, It can prevent the player from feeling unnatural. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to identify whether the variation is a variation of a pseudo symbol or a variation of a special symbol, and even a pseudo symbol variation display can have an expectation for a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the switching special variation pattern is shown in FIG. 12 when a game ball is won at the first start opening 71 when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern other than the ceiling variation pattern. In this way, the pseudo-pattern that has been variably displayed disappears, and the black screen is displayed momentarily. Thereafter, the same special symbols on the left and right are displayed in a “reach state” in which they are stopped and displayed, and the characters “arrival in heaven!” Are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol “777” is stopped and displayed to notify the player that the player has won a big hit. The switching special variation pattern is set with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  Therefore, even if the closed door displayed in the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not displayed, the player can produce a big win, and the player has an expectation for the big hit even if the ceiling fluctuation pattern is not used. Can be made. Further, by displaying the black screen for a moment at the start of the change of the special symbol, it is possible to give a fresh taste and to focus on the subsequent change of the special symbol.

  The short-time special variation pattern is configured with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, and a configuration in which a predetermined symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is suddenly displayed in a state where all the symbols are aligned and is notified that a big hit has been made. It has become. With this configuration, the game time in the short-time game state can be shortened, and the player can suppress getting bored with the game early because the jackpots are generated at short intervals. Further, the game store side can shorten the time during the short game when the game ball is not consumed, and can increase sales.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the determination in step S303 is not correct (S304: No), a determination error notification command is set (S307). In this embodiment, since it is determined that the value of the random number counter C1 per special symbol is a win, if it is determined that the game is out, the gaming machine has been tampered with illegally, Since it is considered that there is a malfunction, it is possible to notify the gaming machine side of the abnormality of the gaming machine by setting a judgment error notification command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the determination error notification command, error processing is executed so that a display indicating an error (for example, a character such as “determination error”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is generated (S308). A stop type command is set (S309). In the present embodiment, only the jackpot stop type command is set as the stop type command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the distribution device error notification control process (S301), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the sorting apparatus error notification control process (S301).

  Based on the position of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 and the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e, it is checked whether the data is the same as the data set in the sorting character position data 202i (S401). Here, the data set in the assigned character position data 202i is compared with the data corresponding to the three before and after the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e to check whether the data is the same. Run. As a result, when there is a game ball remaining in the distribution winning device 64 (flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), the remaining game ball is moved to the distribution rotating member 64a1. In this case as well, the position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 in the sorting accessory position data 202i corresponding to the three times before and after is determined from the value of the sorting winning ball counter 203e. Thus, even in a normal game (a game in which fraud or the like is not performed), it is possible to suppress a problem that an error is notified.

  If it is determined that the collation results do not match (S401: No), an error notification command is set (S408). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, the display error notification command is set, and an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a character “position error” is displayed). On the other hand, when it is determined that the matching results match (S401: No), the process of S402 is executed. In addition, each process from S402 to S408 executes a collation process as to whether or not there is an abnormality in the positions of the second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8, similarly to the process of S401. Since the collating process is the same method as that of the first sorting rotating member 64a1, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 71 or the second start port 300, the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S301) is executed. , It may be configured to execute only when the first start opening 71 is won. With this configuration, when the second start port 300 is won, the control process can be reduced and the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the process of collating each of the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is executed. However, only the position of the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 is determined by the distribution winning ball counter 203e. Whether or not the value is the same as the data corresponding to the assigned character position data 202 i corresponding to 0 (in this embodiment, “0” indicating that the second storage portion 64 d 8 faces upward) is collated. It may be configured.

  With this configuration, after guiding the game ball to the first start port 71 (the eighth guide path 64z16), the second housing portion 64d8 is in a state of facing upward, By checking only the state, it can be easily determined whether or not the game ball has been normally guided to the first start port 71 via the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8. Further, even if there is a game ball that has subsequently won in the distribution winning device 64, it is necessary to enter a large number of game balls before the game ball reaches the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8. The position of the sorting rotation member 64a8 can be determined and determined. Therefore, it can be determined whether fraud has been performed correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the error notification process is executed when the collation does not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of invalidating the jackpot may be executed, or may be notified by voice or the like. In addition, a signal may be output to a hall computer or the like so that the player cannot identify it. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the game store side to recognize and respond earlier that the fraud has been notified. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are detected one by one. However, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined. It is configured to detect at one time, and the detected data (if normal, “10101010” indicating the position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when 256 game balls have entered. ) And position data corresponding to 0 (256) of the distribution initial position data 202h or the distribution accessory position data 202i. By comprising in this way, it can collate more easily whether a position is normal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the distribution winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interruption process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process (S105). In this distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105), the number of balls entered by the game balls into the distribution winning device 64 is counted, and the number of balls received is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Processing for generating a distributed winning ball number command is executed. Hereinafter, the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) will be described.

  In the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105), first, it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning apparatus 64 (S501). If it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S501: Yes), the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S502). 1 is added to the value of the acquired allocated winning ball number counter 203e and updated, and the updated value is stored in the allocated winning ball number counter 203e (S503). In addition, when the value of the acquired allocation winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, when 1 is added, the initial value is updated to 0. A distributed winning ball number command indicating the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is set (generated) (S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the entrance 640 (S501: No), this process is terminated.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S505). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first start port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S505: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is set to zero. That is, the start of measurement is set for the time from when a game ball entering the first starting port 71 enters the entering port 640 to win the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  With this configuration, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 64 is accurately determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The number of balls can be recognized, and effects based on the number of game balls won in the distribution winning device 64 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the distribution discharge process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this sort discharge process (S106). The distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106) is a process for counting the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize winning device 64 from one of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8. Executed. Hereinafter, the sorting and discharging process (FIG. 19, S106) will be described.

  In the distribution discharge process (FIG. 19, S106), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 of the distribution winning device 64 (S601). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the first to eighth discharge ports 650a1 to 650a8 (S601: Yes), the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is acquired (S602). 1 is added to the value of the obtained allocated discharge ball number counter 203f to update, and the updated value is stored in the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f (S603). Note that the value of the allocated distributed ball number counter 203f is 255, and when it is updated by adding 1, it is updated to 0. A distributed discharge ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the updated value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is set (generated) (S604).

  In this way, by counting the number of game balls discharged from the distribution winning device 64 and checking the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e, the game illegally entered the distribution winning device 64 It is possible to monitor whether or not there is a ball (for example, a game ball is entered from any one of the first to eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8).

  Next, the start winning process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S107). In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 71 or the second start port 300. Processing for storing data such as various counter values acquired in the symbol execution area is executed. In addition, when a game ball wins at the first start port 71, the flow-down time after winning the game ball distribution winning device 64 at the first start port 71 is a set value (in the present embodiment). 5 seconds to 7 seconds), and if it is outside the set value, error processing is executed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 20, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start opening 71 (start winning prize) (S701). Here, a winning at the first start port 71 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start port 71 (start winning has been received) (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the distribution winning flag 203h is set to on (S702). When it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is off (S702: No), a winning / winning error notifying the audio lamp control device 113 that there has been an abnormal winning at the first start port 71. A command is set (generated) (S703). Here, the distribution winning flag 223h is a flag that is set to ON when the 256th game ball that will win the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, so Even if it is determined that a game ball has won the first starting port 71, if the distribution winning flag 203h is off, there is a possibility that the first starting port 71 has been illegally won. Perform error handling. As a result, even if the sensor or the like of the first starting port 71 is illegally turned on by electromagnetic waves or the like from the outside of the gaming machine, the illegality can be detected, and illegal jackpot acquisition can be prevented. .

  The distribution winning flag 203h is set off (S704). It is determined whether or not the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is within a set value (5 seconds to 7 seconds in the present embodiment) (S705). In the present embodiment, the time required from winning through the first entrance 71 after passing through the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 is designed to be 6 seconds. Therefore, when a fraudulent or the like that illegally reaches the first starting port 71 by wrapping a piano wire or the like around the game ball by setting the first and second seconds as a set value and 5 seconds to 7 seconds as a set value is performed. Can detect fraud when the time until the first start port 71 is reached is outside the set value.

  When it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is outside the set value (S705: No), the process of S703 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is within the set value (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S706). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S706: Yes), the process of S703 is executed. Here, when a game ball is won at the first start port 71 and the special symbol is changed, the change time of 10 seconds of the normal special symbol change pattern is the longest change pattern. Since it is usually not possible to win the first start port 71 next after the 10 seconds have elapsed, if it is determined that the special symbol has been won at the first start port 71 during a change, By setting a winning error command, the game store can recognize at an early stage that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine. Therefore, even if the first start opening 71 is continuously won illegally, the gaming store side recognizes the fraud at an early stage, so that damage caused by the fraud can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S706: No), the values of the random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 per special symbol are acquired, and the special symbol is executed. It is stored in the area 203a (S707). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start opening 71 (S701: No), the process of S708 is executed.

  It is determined whether the game ball has won the second start opening 300 (S708). If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 300 (S708: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has won the second start opening 300 (S708: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S709). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S709), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S709: No), each value of the random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 per special symbol is acquired to execute the special symbol. It is stored in the area 203a (S710).

  In this way, when a game ball wins at the first start opening 71, whether or not the win is a regular win, the pitching history to the sorting prize winning device 64 (the sorting prize flag 203h is on). Or not), the flow time of the winning game ball (the value of the distribution winning timer 203g), and whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. By executing the error process for setting the winning error command without acquiring the data, it is possible to prevent an illegal jackpot from being generated.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult for the game balls to win the first start port 71 and the second start port 300 at the same time. Further, if a game ball wins the first start port 71 and the second start port 300 at the same time, the first start port 71 is given priority. The game ball won in the second starting port 300 is processed as an invalid ball as the special symbol is changing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the normal symbol variation process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S108). The normal symbol variation process (S108) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol). (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) hit includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays the hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory. . If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S802: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed ( S803). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S822, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83. Regardless of the short-time gaming state and the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state), the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set with a variation time of 3 seconds for both the winning variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S803 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S803, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S803: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S804). . In the process of S804, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S817, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol in a stopped display (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S821, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S804, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S817 and S821. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S805). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S805: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set (806). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is out of place (S805: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S808). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S808: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S808: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S809).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S810). In the processing of S810, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S811).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle counter 203d is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S812). When it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203d is 0 (that is, not in time-shortage) (S812: No), the random number table 202c per normal symbol for non-time-saving (normal gaming state) (FIG. 8 (c) ) Is determined based on the winning determination value (S1013), whereas if it is determined that the value of the time-shortage counter 203k is not 0 (that is, the time is short-time) (S812: Yes). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S814: Yes), the processing of S813 is executed, whereas the special symbol jackpot is determined. If it is determined that the game is not in progress (S814: No), the success / failure determination is made based on the winning determination value in the random symbol table 202c (FIG. 8 (c)) for the normal symbol for time reduction (time reduction gaming state). Result is obtained (S815).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S816). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S816: Yes), a display mode of “◯” which is a display mode at the time of winning is set (S817). The opening time of the blades 300a and 300b of the ordinary electric accessory is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S820). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out of place) (S816: No), the display mode of “x” that is the display mode at the time of disconnection is set. (S819). Then, the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 s (S822).

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S109). This through gate passing process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, and when the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol.

  In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 22, S109), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S901). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (gate) 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c is If it is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter The value (M) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S904). Then, the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol acquired in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (ordinary symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S905). In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol reservation 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S910), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 24), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). (S1005: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S1112 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014).

  The distribution position initialization process is executed (S1015). The distribution position initialization process (S1015) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, but the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are predetermined. This is a process for setting an initial value. After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 5, 122) is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1011). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (FIG. 27, S1200) described later.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is in an initialized state until the distribution winning ball number command or the like is output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on. Not limited to this, the information backed up by the main control device 110 (for example, the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e) in the processing of S1010 of the start-up processing (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Etc.) may be output as a backup command so that the audio lamp control device 113 backs up the MPU 221. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 can also back up data and the like in a state immediately before the power is turned off.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the distribution position initialization process (S1015), which is one process in the start-up process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. 25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the distribution position initialization process (S1015).

  In the sorting position initialization process (FIGS. 25 and 26, S1015), first, the position of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is acquired from the sorting position confirmation sensor 262 (S1101). Here, the distribution position confirmation sensor 262 is an angle sensor that detects the rotation angle of the first distribution rotation member 64a1, and not only the first distribution rotation member 64a1 but also the second to eighth distribution rotation members 64a2. Each rotation angle can be detected for .about.64a8. The rotation angle is set to be a positive value when the first storage portions 64c1 to 64c8 are facing upward, and a negative value when the second storage portions 64d1 to 64d8 are facing upward. If the acquired value is a positive value, “1” is acquired, and if it is a negative value, “0” is acquired.

  The initial position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 stored in the sorting initial position data 202h (in the present embodiment, the first storage portion 64c1 indicates that the value is acquired in the processing of S1101) Whether it is the same as the value of “1”) is determined (S1102). If it is determined that the acquired value is the same as the initial position data (S1102: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value is different from the initial position data (S1102: No), the initial position data of the first sorting rotating member 64a1 stored in the sorting initial position data 202h (this embodiment) Then, according to “10101010”), the sorting position adjusting motor 263 is set (S1103). In the present embodiment, the sorting position adjusting motor 263 is set so that the first sorting rotating member 64a1 is rotated rightward to a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, a position of plus 90 degrees).

  In the processing of S1104 to S1124, the initial positions of the second to eighth sorting rotating members 64a2 to 64a8 are set in the same manner as the first sorting rotating member 64a1. The initial position of the second sorting rotation member 64a2 is a minus 90 degree position where the second storage portion 64d2 faces upward, and the initial position of the third sorting rotation member 64a3 is the first storage portion 64c3. Is the position of plus 90 degrees, which is the position facing upward, the initial position of the fourth sorting rotation member 64a4 is the position of minus 90 degrees, the position where the second storage portion 64d4 faces upward, and the fifth sorting rotation The initial position of the member 64a5 is a position of plus 90 degrees where the first storage portion 64c5 faces upward, and the initial position of the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 is a position where the second storage portion 64d6 faces upward. The position of minus 90 degrees, the initial position of the seventh sorting rotation member 64a7 is the position of plus 90 degrees where the first storage portion 64c7 faces upward, and the initial position of the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8 is Second housing part 64d There are respectively set to the position of minus 90 degrees is a position facing upwards. The setting method is the same as that of the first sorting rotation member 64a1, and therefore will be omitted.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated), the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are set to predetermined initial positions, respectively. As a result, the game store side changes the state of the distribution winning device 64 to the state where the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e in which no game ball is included is 0 (the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8). Is set to the state where the game ball is guided to the first to eighth discharge guide paths 64z1 to 64z15), the RAM 203 is operated to initialize the RAM 203 by operating the RAM erase switch 122. The allocation prize winning device 64 can also be automatically set to the initial state. Therefore, when the game store is opened, a plurality of gaming machines can be easily set to the same state (the value of the same distributed winning ball counter 203e).

  Further, in this embodiment, the initial position of the distribution winning device 64 is set to a state in which the winning ball counter 203e in which no game ball has entered the distribution winning device 64 is 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the number counter 203e is set to 255 (position where the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 guide the game balls to the first to eighth guide paths 64z2 to 64z16), You may comprise so that it may be set to the state which can be made to win the starting port 71 and can give a big hit. By configuring in this way, the game store side can prepare a gaming machine that is immediately awarded a jackpot, and can attract a large number of customers who come to the store in search of the gaming machine set in that way at the time of opening the store It is possible to increase the number of customers who visit the store from the opening. In addition, you may comprise so that the game store side can set suitably the state of the distribution prize-winning apparatus 64 with a switch etc. FIG.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which confirms a position with respect to each of the 1st-8th distribution rotating member 64a1-64a8, and performs the process set to an initial value, it is not restricted to this, All The sorting rotation member may be forcibly set to an initial value. As described above, the initial setting process can be simplified by collectively performing the initial setting process regardless of the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the process when the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process (FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). In the main process (S1200), roughly divided, a counter update process, a power-off process, and an abnormal winning monitoring process for the distribution winning device 64 are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 27, S1200), first, output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

  The winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1202, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, execution of various effects corresponding to the big win, and a specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a A jackpot control process for opening or closing the door is performed (S1203), and an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the blades 300a, 300b of the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 300 is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1204), when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as a normal symbol, or when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a normal jackpot, the opening time of the electric accessory When the number of times of opening is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, the display control process of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1205). Display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1206). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the value. Then, the variation display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the blades 300a, 300b of the ordinary electric accessory are released for a predetermined time.

  Next, a distribution error process is executed (S1207). The distribution error process (S1207) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28, but the difference between the game balls won and discharged in the distribution winning device 64 is an abnormal set value (in this embodiment, 10 or more) or when the 256th game ball has entered the sorting prize winning device 64, the flow time of the game ball is equal to or more than the average number of seconds to reach the first start port 71 (this implementation) In the embodiment, a process for determining whether an abnormality has occurred is executed by determining whether or not 7 seconds or more have elapsed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1209). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1209: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated (S1210).

  Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 99 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the random counter per special symbol). The initial value of C1, the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol) can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1208, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1208: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 23 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S1208 is executed at the timing when the series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1207 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the process of S1210 performed within the remaining time. ing. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial setting process (FIG. 24, S1001) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the distribution error process (S1207) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the distribution error process (S1207).

  In the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207), first, the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f is subtracted from the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e to obtain an abnormal set value or more (in this embodiment, 10 or more). ) Is determined (S1301). The subtraction here is an operation for obtaining the number of difference balls between the game balls that have entered and the game balls that have been discharged. For example, the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is 3, If the value of the discharged ball number counter 203f is 254, the subtraction result is calculated as 5. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls being entered in the allocation prize winning device 64 is 9 if it is a design value, and if there are more, the ball is entered without going through the entrance 640 (for example, the first An injustice can be considered in which a game ball enters from any one of the eighth outlets 650a1 to 650a8.

  When it is determined that the difference between the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the distributed discharged ball counter 203f is equal to or greater than the abnormal setting value (S1301: Yes), an error notification command is set (generated) (S1302). . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error notification command, it generates a display command for displaying a display mode (for example, a character such as “abnormal character abnormal winning error”) indicating an abnormality on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the difference between the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball counter 203f is less than the abnormal setting value (S1301: No), the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON. Is determined (S1303). If it is determined that the distribution prize flag 203h is set to OFF (S1303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S1303: Yes), the value of the distribution winning timer 203g is acquired. 1 is added to the value of the acquired allocation prize timer 203g (S1305).

  It is determined whether or not the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is a value indicating the arrival average number of seconds or more (7 seconds or more in the transliteration form) (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is equal to or greater than the average arrival seconds (S1306: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1307). Note that the processing in S1307 is the same as that in S1302. On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution prize timer 203g is less than the average arrival seconds (S1306: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207) is executed at intervals of 4 ms, and it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the distribution winning device 64. As soon as it is determined that game balls exceeding the design value have entered the distribution prize device 64 (there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged), error processing can be executed. Therefore, fraud and abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 can be detected early. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be further reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that the number of game balls (256 in this embodiment) that will be awarded to the first starting port 71 has entered the distribution winning device 64, the game Since the time until the ball reaches the first start port 71 is monitored, the control load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is always compared with the case where the flow time of the game ball that has entered is monitored. Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number for determining that the difference between the number of balls entered into the distribution prize winning device 64 and the number of discharged balls is abnormal is set to a preset value. You may make it the structure which provides a setting switch etc. By configuring in this way, it can be adjusted and set in accordance with a change in the rate at which game balls enter the distribution prize device 64 (frequency of entering) by adjusting the game nails or the like. Therefore, it is possible to monitor the abnormality with the abnormality setting value that more closely matches the state of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to accurately detect the abnormality.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1600) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process (FIG. 29) is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-on process of S1619 (see FIG. 30) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 30, S1616), it executes the power-off process of S1619. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1619 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1502: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1619 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1619, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to S1508.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1502: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S169, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1504 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1504, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1506). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1619 is executed (see S1618 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1619 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1619 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1509), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1513), and the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1508 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1508 is performed via the processes of S1504 to S1506. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1510, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1509 is that if the process from S1504 to S1506 is reached via the process in S1506, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process (S1600). When the main process (S1600) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1600) was started or since the last time the process of S1601 was executed ( S1601) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes in S1602 to S1610. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. In steps S1602 to S1610, the process is related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1611 and the command determination process of S1614 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1611 in a short cycle, the setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process, and by executing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, It is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1609 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S1606), as will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k. .

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1611. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1610), a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1608 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1611, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the fluctuation display setting process (S1611), a pseudo fluctuation process is executed (S1612). The pseudo variation process (S1612) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the pseudo variation pattern (pseudo dynamic display) of the pseudo symbol to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81. A mode) is determined, and a process of generating a pseudo variation pattern for display indicating the determined variation pattern is executed.

  After the pseudo variation process (S1612), the background selection process is executed (S1613). The background selection process (S1613) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied. In the case of changing, processing for determining the type of background image to be changed is executed.

  A command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is executed (S1614). Details of the command determination processing (S1614) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1614 is completed, a process of updating each counter that adds 1 to the counter value such as the pseudo fluctuation selection counter 223a used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1615). It is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1618), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1619). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1620), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The memory of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the processing of S1616 (S1616: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1617), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1617: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process (S1600) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1617: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1600) is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, for convenience of description, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To do. Details of the command determination process (S1614) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1701). Here, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying a special symbol. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1702). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1703). The type of variation pattern extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the type of variation pattern of the special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) described later. This is used when setting a special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the special symbol variation display effect and the type of variation pattern of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1704: Yes), when the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON. (S1705). The stop type (either jackpot A or jackpot B) is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), it is determined whether a distributed winning ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). If it is determined that the allocated winning ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the winning ball number indicated by the received distributed winning ball number command is extracted, and the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is subtracted. It is stored (stored) in the payout winning ball number counter 223d (S1708). Here, when the value of the distributed winning ball counter 223d is 0, 1 is subtracted to 255. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is acquired, and the value is updated by adding 1, and stored in the pay-in-win counter 223f (S1709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution winning ball number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1707: No), it is determined whether the distribution discharge ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (No). S1710). When it is determined that the distributed discharge ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1710: Yes), the discharged ball number is extracted from the received distributed discharge ball number command, and the value obtained by subtracting 1 is subtracted. This is stored in the sorted discharge ball number counter 223e (S1711). Here, in the case where the distributed discharge ball number command is a command indicating 0, 1 is subtracted to 255. The value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is acquired, and the updated value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value is stored in the pay-in-win counter 223f (S1712).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distributed discharge ball number command has not been received (S1710: No), it is determined whether an error notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1713). When it is determined that an error notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1713: Yes), a display error notification command is set (generated) (S1714). This error notification command is a command for displaying the error content on the third symbol display device 81 in characters based on the type of the error notification command output by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an error notification command has not been received (S1713: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1715). If it is determined that an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1715: Yes), an ending setting process is executed (S1717). The ending setting process (S1717) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32, but is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of jackpot game executed (either jackpot A or jackpot B). A process for setting the ending screen to be executed is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1716: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S1716).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ending setting process (S1719), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S1719).

  In the ending setting process (FIG. 32, S1719), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot being executed was a jackpot A (shift to the short-time gaming state after 16R jackpot) (S1801). When it is determined that the big hit being executed is the big hit A (S1801: Yes), the time-shortening effect display (FIG. 13a) is set as the display mode (ending image) of the ending effect (S1802). On the other hand, when it is determined that the big jackpot being executed is the big jackpot B (the transition to the normal gaming state after 16R jackpot) (S1801: No), as a display mode of the ending effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The normal effect display (FIG. 13B) is set (S1803). A display ending command indicating the set ending effect is set (generated).

  In the short time effect display, as shown in FIG. 13A, the characters “Magic world mode entry” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the short-time gaming state is informed by the name of the magic world mode, and the player is informed that the short-time gaming state is in effect. In the normal effect display, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the characters “entering the celestial challenge mode” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state) is notified by the name of heaven challenge mode. The player recognizes that the celestial challenge mode shifts to a game in which the sorting prize-winning device 64 enters the game until the game ball is awarded to the first start port 71 (in the game production, the game reaches the heaven).

  In the present embodiment, the player first determines whether the executed jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B based on the display mode of the ending. Thereby, the game can be performed with an expectation that the jackpot being executed is not the jackpot A until just before the jackpot ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the variable display setting process (S1611) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1611).

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223b is off (S1901: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the processing of S1909 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off (S1902).

  In the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether or not the pseudo symbol is being variably displayed (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped and displayed (S1903: No), the variation in the variable display effect of the special symbol extracted from the variation pattern command in the processing of S1703 of the command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614). The pattern is acquired from the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 (S1904).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 that the pseudo symbol is variably displayed (S1903: Yes), the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is: Whether it is a ceiling fluctuation pattern or not is discriminated (S1905). When it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a ceiling variation pattern (S1905: Yes), a special ceiling variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1906). On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not the ceiling variation pattern (S1905: No), a switching special variation pattern is acquired (selected) (S1907). A display variation pattern command corresponding to the obtained variation pattern is set (generated) (S1908).

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223c is set to ON (S1909). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223c is on (S1909: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to off (S1910).

  In the process of S1706 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614), the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set (S1911). A display stop type command corresponding to the set stop type is set (S1912).

  As described above, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, when the pseudo symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed, the variation pattern command indicates that the variation pattern command indicates. Thus, the ceiling special variation pattern or the switching special variation pattern is selected. Thereby, the display mode of the special symbol can be matched with the display mode connected to the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it can be configured to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the display is a variation display with a pseudo symbol or a variation display with a special symbol. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the pseudo fluctuation process (S1612), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this pseudo variation process (S1612). The pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) is a process for determining a pseudo-pattern variation pattern to be variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612) will be described below.

  In the pseudo-variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), first, it is determined whether the special symbol is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2001). If it is determined that the special symbol is being variably displayed (S2001: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2001: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2002). If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2002: No), it is determined in the process of S1707 of the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) that a distributed winning ball number command has been received. Is determined (S2003). When it is determined that the distributed winning ball number command has been received (S2003: Yes), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2004). Based on the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d acquired in S2004, a pseudo variation pattern is selected (determined) from the pseudo variation table 222e (see FIG. 10A). (S2005). A pseudo variation pattern command corresponding to the selected pseudo variation pattern is set (generated) (S2006). On the other hand, if it is determined that the distributed winning ball number command has not been received (S2003: No), this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the special symbol and the pseudo symbol are not variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the distribution winning ball number command is received (that is, a game is entered at the entrance 640 of the allocation winning device 64). When a sphere enters), a pseudo-variable pseudo-variation pattern is selected, and the start of pseudo-variable display is set. Therefore, the player feels as if the lottery game has started because the game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, and the pseudo-graphic variation display is a special symbol variation display. It feels like it is, and with the expectation of a jackpot, you can see the fluctuation of the pseudo symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, even for a player who is skilled in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pseudo-pattern variation pattern is selected based on the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d (the ratio of the type of pseudo-variation pattern selected (selected). Therefore, the number of game balls won in the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted based on the type of the pseudo variation pattern selected and the frequency thereof. Therefore, even if the player knows that the variation is a pseudo symbol, he / she can obtain more important information related to the jackpot than the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, so he / she is more interested in the pseudo symbol variation display. You can play games.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the background selection process (S1613) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the background selection process (S1613). The background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613) determines whether or not to change the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and executes the process of determining the background image to be changed. Hereinafter, background selection processing (FIG. 35, S1613) will be described.

  In the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613), first, the number of game balls in which the value of the winning prize counter 223f is larger than 3, that is, the number of game balls that have entered (remaining) in the distribution prize device 64 It is determined whether or not there are four or more (S2101). If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 is four or more (S2101: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2102). A background pattern is selected from the background selection table 222f (see FIG. 10B) based on the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d acquired in the processing of S2102 (S2103). . A display background command corresponding to the selected background pattern is set (generated) (S2104). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pay-in-win counter 223f is 3 or less (S2101: No), this process ends.

  Thus, since the background image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is changed when the number of game balls entering the distribution winning device 64 is four or more, it is random. The background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed at an appropriate timing. The background image to be selected is the ratio of the types of background images selected by the number of game balls that have entered the allocation prize winning device 64 (the value of the secondary allocation prize winning ball counter 223d) (the selected background image). Frequency) is set to be changed, so that the background image to be selected is a hint for the player to predict the number of balls entered by the sorting and winning device 64. Can interest you.

  In addition, the background image selected when the 256th game ball to be won at the first starting port 71 enters the allocation prize winning device 64 is limited to the precursor C background (FIG. 13C). Therefore, when the precursor C background is selected, the first start port 71 can be expected to win. Therefore, the player can be interested in the background image in addition to the jackpot, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In this way, a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) of game balls wins the distribution winning device 64, so that the player is always given a big hit, so that the big hit for a long time. It is possible to prevent problems that are not given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessively large.

  Further, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the player may get bored with the game before the predetermined number wins the distribution winning device 64, but the pseudo symbol configured in the same display manner as the special symbol. By starting the change display at the timing when the game ball enters the distribution prize device 64, the player can enjoy the change display of the pseudo design as if the change of the special symbol is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, when another person plays a game or when a game is started at the time of opening a store, it is impossible to determine how many game balls have entered the allocation prize winning device 64. The frequency (ratio) of the types of pseudo-variation patterns selected based on the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning device 64 (value of the follower prize winning ball counter 223d) is set to be changed. Therefore, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 64 can be predicted from the type of the pseudo variation pattern to be selected. Therefore, even when the special symbol is not variably displayed, it is possible to prevent the game from being bored by the variably displayed pseudo symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state), the jackpot does not occur until a predetermined number (256 in the present embodiment) enters the sorting prize winning device 64. When the game state is entered, it is possible to enter the second starting port 300, and since the jackpot is given to the player at an early stage, the speed feeling until the big hit between the normal game state and the short-time game state is obtained. By making the difference greatly, it is possible to make the player have a stronger desire to shift to the short-time gaming state and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player with game types that are greatly different between the normal game state and the short-time game state.

  In addition, although it has been a configuration that always wins by winning the first starting port 71, when winning the first starting port 71, after entering the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 By determining whether the arrival time until winning the first start port 71 is appropriate or whether the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 are appropriate, a big hit due to fraud It can suppress giving. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is counted, thereby counting the number of entrances (the number of entrances to the ceiling) necessary to win the first start port 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may naturally be configured to make a determination at each position of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the process of counting the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640, so the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, after the distribution rotating member guides the game ball, it returns to the position before guidance (for example, after receiving the game ball and guiding the game ball with the first housing portion facing upward) Even if the momentum is too strong or the first storage part turns upward again due to vibrations to the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the count value of the entrance 640 and the distribution rotating member The problem that the state (position) is deviated can be suppressed, and the number of entering balls required up to the first start port 71 can be determined based on the current position of the sorting and rotating member.

  Further, the count value of the entrance 640 and the respective positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are collated at regular intervals and the count value is compared with the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a1. You may comprise so that it may correct | amend based on the position of 64a8. In such a case, when the collation result is corrected differently for a predetermined number of times or more, an error notification is given and the amusement shop side can confirm whether fraud has been performed or whether it is a malfunction due to a failure. You may comprise as follows. By comprising in this way, the count value of the entrance 640 and the state of the 1st-8th distribution rotation member 64a1-64a8 can be match | combined correctly, and control, such as an exact presentation, can be performed. .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since it comprised with the eight distribution rotation members of the 1st-8th distribution rotation members 64a1-64a8, each position can be shown with 1 bit data, and a total of 8 bits. Since it can be composed of data, data can be easily transmitted and received.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 66, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the number of balls that will enter the first starting port 71 enters the distribution winning device 64, and the game ball wins the first starting port 71. In this case, the case where the game ball is fired toward the specific winning port 65a in the right region of the game area where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution winning device 64 is described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the distribution winning device 64, and when a big hit is reached, a game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 even during the big hit. It was set as the structure to do. Depending on the jackpot type, after the jackpot game, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set at predetermined positions by lottery, so that the winning prize device 64 after the jackpot game is set. The number of balls required before winning the first starting port 71 is variably set. Also, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with two ordinary electric accessories, and when each of them is opened, the game ball is guided to a predetermined distribution rotating member, which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. To do.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the second symbol display device 83 is provided with a display unit for displaying the first normal symbol success / failure determination result side by side with “O” and “X”. Below that, a display unit for displaying the determination result of the second normal symbol is arranged side by side with “o” and “x”. In addition, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is a ball (holding ball) of which the variation display is not executed among the game balls won in the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2. The display part which shows the number of reservation balls which is a number by a lighting state is set.

  The variable winning device 65 provided at the lower right side of the game area is provided at the upper left of the distribution winning device 64 at the center of the game area. A general winning opening 63 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. Further, on the right side surface of the distribution winning device 64, a first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric combination which is an ordinary electric combination and a second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric combination are respectively provided.

  In a normal gaming state (a gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state), the player turns the operation handle 51 to the maximum to the right to fire the game ball with the maximum firing force, thereby causing the right gaming area ( The game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80). Then, the game ball is launched so that the game ball enters the first normal symbol start port 67s1, the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and the entrance port 640. On the other hand, when the big hit game state is reached, the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area (left side of the variable display device unit 80).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39, during the jackpot game, the variable prize winning device 65 rotates the opening / closing plate downward to the front side for a predetermined period, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. Upon receipt, it is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. When the opening / closing plate is rotated downward, the rotation is restricted slightly on the side of the specific winning opening 65a (about 85 to 88 degrees) than 90 degrees, and the opening / closing plate is inclined in the direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Further, the shape of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is formed with a tapered surface 65s inclined toward the right end, and the game ball falling on the tapered surface is guided to the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64. It is comprised so that.

  With such a configuration, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball enters the entrance 640 of the sorting prize winning device 64 more easily than the normal game state (a game state other than the jackpot game). Therefore, when the 256th game ball enters the distribution winning device 64 and wins the first start port 71 and wins a big hit, the game ball is put into the distribution winning device 64 while playing the big hit game. By entering the ball, after the big hit game, the game ball is in a state of winning the distribution winning device 64, and the number of remaining balls up to the 256th can be reduced. Therefore, the next winning can be given to the player at an early stage.

  In addition, it is possible to adjust the game ball so that it does not easily fall on the tapered surface 65s (the game ball flows down near the left side of the variable winning device 65) by firing the game ball weakly. If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the prize winning device 64 has approached 256, which will win the first start port 71, the launch force of the game ball is adjusted to weaken by adjusting the operation handle 51, 256 game balls enter the distribution winning device 64 during the big hit, and wins during the big hit game at the first start opening 71, so that the winning to the first start opening 71 becomes an invalid ball. It becomes the structure which can prevent becoming. Accordingly, the profits obtained by the player vary depending on the player's judgment and the game method, so that the player can concentrate and play the game. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game.

  In addition, it is possible to set the game ball launch so that it cannot be weakly adjusted by continuously performing the maximum number of times (for example, 5 consecutive times), and deliberately let the first start port 71 win a prize during the big hit. You may comprise. By doing in this way, an upper limit can be set to the number of consecutive jackpots, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, the distribution winning device 64 is provided with a first blade 64s1 obliquely above the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 on the right side surface, and secondly above the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. Each blade 64s2 is provided. Each of the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees to the outside of the sorting and winning device 64 around the lower end portion by a solenoid. The first blade 64s1 normally stands upright and is configured to close the first normal entrance 640s1 through which the game ball formed on the right side surface of the sorting and winning device 64 can pass. When it comes to the symbol, the game ball is turned to the right by about 45 degrees to guide the game ball to the first normal entrance. The second blade 64s2 is configured in the same manner as the first blade 64s1. Each of the first normal entrance 640s1 and the second normal entrance 640s2 is configured by a gate type sensor that can detect that a game ball has passed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 38, a game in which the first blade 64s1 rotates and enters the first normal entrance 640s1 inside the distribution winning device 64. A first normal guiding path 64m1 for guiding the sphere to the sixth sorting rotating member 64a6 is provided. The first normal guiding path 64m1 is configured by a wall portion protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and forms a guiding path on which the game ball can roll. Further, a fifth facing member 64t5 is provided above the first ordinary guiding path 64m1 so as to form a width that allows a game ball to pass between the first ordinary guiding path 64m1. Even if the momentum of the game ball flowing down the fifth guide path 64z10 is strong, it collides with the fifth facing member 64t5, and further, the game ball flows down in the direction of the sixth outlet 650a6 without being completely guided by the fifth facing member 64t5. Even so, it is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6 by the first normal guiding path 64m1 (a game ball is prevented from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down the fifth guide path 64z10 from reaching the sixth discharge port 650a6 without passing through the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6. Therefore, it can suppress that it becomes disadvantageous to a player. Also, the game ball that has entered the second normal entrance 640s2 is provided with a second normal guide path 64m2 in the same manner as the game ball that has entered the first normal entrance 640s1. The second ordinary guiding path 64m2 is configured similarly to the first ordinary guiding path 64m1.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game area, a first normal symbol start port 67s1 configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough and a second normal symbol start port 67s2 are provided directly below the first normal symbol start port 67s1. Two nails are disposed above the first normal symbol start port 67s1, and the amount of game balls entering the first normal symbol start port 67s1 by adjusting the inclination of the nail ( (Ease of entering the ball) can be adjusted. Also, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 have the same shape and are arranged in series in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has entered the first normal symbol start port 67s1 is the first one. 2 It is easy to enter the normal symbol start port 67s2.

  In addition, the second symbol display device 83 displays the first normal symbol display portion 83a on which the first normal symbol based on the start winning at the first normal symbol start port 67s1 is variably displayed and the second normal symbol start port 67s2. A second normal symbol display portion 83b on which the second normal symbol based on the start winning is displayed is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, but not limited thereto, they may be arranged in parallel in the left and right, The variable display device unit 80 may be sandwiched between the left and right sides of the game area, or may be appropriately disposed at a desired position.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, as shown in FIG. 42A, the random symbol table 202c per ordinary symbol is deleted for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the random table per first ordinary symbol is stored. 202c1, a random number table 202c2 per second normal symbol, a status selection table 202k, and a random number setting table 202m are respectively added.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 is a normal symbol acquired when a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). The hit random number counter C4 is a data table in which random number values of the random number counter C4 for normal symbols determined to be hit are stored. In the present embodiment, a value in the range of “5 to 7” is set as a random number value in the first normal symbol random number table 202c1 as a random number value determined to be a winning. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised with the pachinko machine 10 in which time-saving game is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the second normal symbol random number table 202c2 is the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 in the normal gaming state (non-timeless gaming state). The hit random number counter C4 is a data table in which random number values of the random number counter C4 for normal symbols determined to be hit are stored. In the present embodiment, a value of “3” is set as the random number value in the second normal symbol random number table 202c2 as the random number value determined to be winning. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised with the pachinko machine 10 in which time-saving game is not set.

  In the special hit type table 202b, instead of the big hit A and big hit B, the big hits C to F are set corresponding to the values of the special hit type counter C2 in the special hit type table 202b in the first embodiment. Yes. The jackpot C is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 0 to 19. The jackpot C is a jackpot game consisting of five rounds in the jackpot game. After the big hit, a random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) for setting the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 by lottery is executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot D is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is a value in the range of 20 to 35. The jackpot D is a jackpot game consisting of five rounds in the jackpot game. After the big hit, the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) for setting the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 by lottery is not executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot E is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 36 to 39. In the jackpot game, a jackpot game composed of 16R rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set by lottery. The setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is not executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  The jackpot F is a jackpot type selected when the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of 40 to 99. In the jackpot game, a jackpot game consisting of 16 rounds is executed in the jackpot game, and after the jackpot, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting prize winning device 64 are set by lottery. Setting processing (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. After the big hit game, the normal game state (non-time-short game state) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the status selection table 202k is a data table in which the values of the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the value of a status selection counter 203m described later are assigned to the statuses A to E. . In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the value of the random counter 203q described later is a status change value (any one of 0 to 39 in this embodiment) The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k based on the values of the distributed winning ball counter 203e and the status selection counter 203m.

  In the random number setting table 202m, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the number of game balls that have entered the allocation winning device 64 set to the initial state is 0, 100, 200, and 255. It is the data table in which the value of the random counter 203p is each set with respect to each positional information with respect to each number of entering balls of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Specifically, if the value of the random counter 203p is in the range of 0 to 24, the first to eighth swings when the number of balls entered into the sorting prize winning device 64 is 0 (or 256). The position information “10101010” of each of the minute rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 is selected. Similarly, if the value is in the range of 25 to 29, the position information “10001100” of each of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of entering balls is 100 is selected. If the value is in the range of 30 to 89, the position information “10111001” of each of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 200 is selected. If the value is in the range of 90 to 99, the position information “01010101” of each of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 when the number of balls entered is 255 is selected.

  In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203c, and the hour / medium counter 203d are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the first normal symbol is deleted. Reserved ball storage area 203b1, second normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2, first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1, second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2, first normal power flag 203j1, second normal power flag 203j2, A first general power timer 203k1, a second general power timer 203k2, a status selection counter 203m, a status storage area 203n, a random counter 203p, a distribution position storage area 203q, and a distribution maintenance flag 203r are added.

  The first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) upon detection of a start winning at the first ordinary symbol starting port 67s1. It is. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed (start winning prize) to the first normal symbol start port 67s1 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49), the random number per normal symbol is read from the counter buffer. The value of the counter C4 is acquired and stored in the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1. The first normal symbol flag provided in the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1 is set to ON and stored (stored). The first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 has four reserved areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the first ordinary symbol flag) can be stored (held) up to four times. Have. In the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1, the data in the reserved ball is stored in the order in which the data of the reserved balls are consumed in the order of passing through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (start winning prize). It is stored in order from the area (holding area corresponding to the number of balls held).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes the first normal operation described above in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize (value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b1, the data corresponding to one starting prize is used as the first normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b1. Shifts to the first normal symbol holding ball execution area provided at. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 is a storage area for storing a random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 41) upon detection of a start winning at the second ordinary symbol start port 67s2. Since the configuration is the same as that of the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 passes through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 49) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds ( The number of held balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 83) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the fact that it is referred to as “start prize” hereinafter. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 24, S1014). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S839 in FIG. 54).

  The second normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a counter that counts up to four times with respect to the number of reserved balls that the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start opening 67s2, and a first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1. Since it is the same structure, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The first normal power flag 203j1 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance process performed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 56, S116), the game ball is set to ON based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1. On the other hand, the value of the first general electric timer 203k1 for measuring the time after the game ball has passed through a first normal entrance 640s1 described later is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (5 seconds in this embodiment). When it is determined that it has elapsed, it is set to off. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the first general power flag 203j1 is set to off.

  The second power transmission flag 203j2 is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in respect to the second normal entrance 640s2, the on / off setting is executed in the same manner as the first ordinary power flag 203j1. The second general power flag 203j2 is set to OFF when the second general power timer 203k2 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (2s in the present embodiment).

  The first general electric timer 203k1 is a timer for measuring the flow time after the game ball passes through the first normal entrance 640s1. In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal entrance 640s1, it is set to 0. While the first ordinary power flag 203j1 indicating that a game ball has passed through the one ordinary entrance 640s1 is set to ON, 1 is added each time the ordinary entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) is executed. Has been updated. The first public power timer 203k1 is incremented by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49). The second general electric timer 203k2 is a timer that measures the flow down time after the game ball passes through the second normal entrance 640s2. Although different in respect to the second normal entrance 640s2, processing such as updating is executed in the same manner as the first general power timer 203k1. In the present embodiment, the first general power timer 203k1 or the second general power timer 203k2 is reset to 0 when the first general power flag 203j1 or the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON, respectively. Although the configuration is not limited thereto, the configuration may be reset to 0 when the first general power flag 203j1 or the second general power flag 203j2 is set to OFF.

  The status selection counter 203m is a counter for selecting a status from the status selection table 202k shown in FIG. The status selection counter 203m is composed of counter values that are updated in the range of “0 to 198”. The status selection counter 203m is incremented and updated by 1 in the processing of S1210 of the main processing (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, when 1 is added to the upper limit value 198, it is updated to 0 which is an initial value. When the RAM 203 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The random counter 203p selects the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 set after the big hit C and the big hit F, which will be described later, from the random number table shown in FIG. 45 (b). It is a counter for. The random counter 203p is configured with a counter value updated in a range of “0 to 99”. The random counter 203p is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1210 of the main process (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, when 1 is added to 99 which is an upper limit, it is updated to 0 which is an initial value. In the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, 0 which is an initial value is set.

  In the distribution position storage area 203q, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotation members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time is stored in a state where there is no game ball flowing down inside the distribution winning device 64. It is a storage area. In the position information stored in the distribution position storage area 203q, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are changed in a state where the game balls are not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. Used to monitor whether fraud is occurring. Specifically, in the allocation error process 2 (FIG. 62, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the difference between the allocated winning ball number counter 203e and the allocated discharged ball number counter 203f is 0 (that is, If it is determined that there is no game ball flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64 at that time is stored. Is done.

  At this time, each position information stored in the sorting position storage area 203q is added to the plus rotation angle (positions where the magnets 64b1 to 64b8 are directed vertically upward by the sorting position check sensor 262). “1” is stored when the rotation angle is set to the negative rotation angle, and “0” is stored when the rotation angle is negative. If 256 game balls have entered the distribution winning device 64 and won the first starting port 71, the position information of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is the first distribution. The information is stored as “10101010” sequentially from the position information of the rotating member 64a1.

  The distribution maintaining flag 203r is a flag indicating that a game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64. The distribution maintaining flag 203r indicates a difference in value between the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball number counter 203f in the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 59, S1320) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When it is determined that the game ball is 0 (that is, a state in which the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64), it is set to ON. On the other hand, when it is determined in the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 that the game ball has entered the entrance slot 640 in the allocation winning apparatus 64, it is turned off. Is set. When the RAM 203 is initialized, it is set to off.

  In the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the contents of the pseudo variation table 222a and the background selection table 222b are changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pseudo variation table 222a in the first embodiment, a pseudo variation pattern is set for the value of the follow-up divided winning ball counter 223d, whereas in the pseudo variation table 222a in the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in 44 (b), the fact that a pseudo variation pattern is set for the status of the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 is changed.

  In the background selection table 222b in the first embodiment, the background pattern is set for the value of the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d, whereas in the background selection table 222b in the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in a), the point that the background pattern is set for the status in the slave status storage area 223h stored based on the status command output by the main controller 110 is changed.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the follow-up prize winning ball counter 223d, the follow-up dispensed ball count counter 223e, and the pay-in prize counter 223f are deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. A secondary status storage area 223h, a normal variation flag 223i, and a background change counter 223j are added.

  The sub status storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the status type (status information) indicated by the received status command based on the reception of the status command output from the main control device 110.

  The normal variation flag 223i is a flag indicating that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 has been received. Set to ON when it is determined in command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed by the MPU 221 to the sound lamp control device 113 that a hit variation pattern command of a normal symbol output from the main control device 110 has been received. Is done. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, when the interrupt normal pseudo fluctuation pattern or the normal normal pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2024 or S2025), it is set to OFF. Is done. When the RAM 223 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The background change counter 223j is a counter value for determining whether or not to change the background pattern (background image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The background change counter 223j is a counter value updated in the range of “0 to 99”. In the process of S1615 of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, 1 is added and updated. When 1 is added to 99 which is the upper limit value, it is updated to 0 which is the initial value. The background selection counter 223j is a counter value acquired in the background selection processing 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) of the second embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment in place of the special symbol change process (FIG. 15, S104). (FIG. 50, S111) replaces the allocation winning process (FIG. 18, S105), and the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) replaces the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 21, S108). The symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113) and the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) are replaced with the through-gate passage process (FIG. 22, S109), and the through-gate passage process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) is a normal incoming ball. Mouth passage processing (FIG. 56, S116) is added respectively. In S101 to S103, S107, S110 to S111 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S101 to S103, S107, S110 to S111 in the first embodiment are executed.

  With reference to FIG. 50, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111). The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 50, S111) of the second embodiment is a special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) in contrast to the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 15, S104) of the first embodiment. Instead, the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is added to the processes of S320 and S330 instead of the processes of S209 and S210, respectively. The processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S201 to S207 and S211 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S203, when it is determined that new data is stored in the special symbol execution area 203a (S203: Yes), the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) is executed. The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51, but the processing necessary for starting the special symbol variation is executed.

  Further, in the process of S208, it is determined what the determined jackpot type is, and if it is jackpot C or jackpot D, the jackpot round number is set to 5 rounds (S320). On the other hand, if the jackpot E or jackpot F, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 rounds (S330). Thereafter, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S211).

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the second embodiment, special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 50, S111) which is one processing of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 49) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. The special symbol variation start process 2 (S310) which is one process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310). The special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 51, S310) of the second embodiment is different from the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S204) of the first embodiment in the distribution device error notification control process (FIG. 17, S301) has been deleted. For the other processes, the same process as the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S204) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, in the second embodiment, the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S1112) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112). In the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) of the second embodiment, it is determined that the game ball has entered the distribution winning apparatus 64 and the distribution winning process (FIG. 18, S105) in the first embodiment. Then, it is different in that processing for determining whether to change the status is executed.

  In the allocation winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance 640 of the allocation winning apparatus 64 (S511). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the entrance 640 (S511: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to off (S512). Thereafter, status determination processing is executed (S513). The status determination process (S513) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but it is determined whether or not a condition for changing the status type is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the status type is set. The determining process is executed.

  The value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is acquired (S514). 1 is added to the value of the obtained distributed winning ball counter 203e to be updated (S515). In addition, when the value of the acquired allocation winning ball number counter 203e is the upper limit value 255, when 1 is added, the initial value is updated to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball is not passing through the entrance 640 (S511: No), this process is terminated.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the updated distributed winning ball counter 203e is a set counter value (in this embodiment, 0 updated by adding 1 from 255) (S516). That is, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the entrance 640 is a game ball that will win the first start port 71. If it is determined that the value is the set counter value (S516: Yes), the value of the distribution prize timer 203g is set to 0 (S517). That is, the start of measurement is set for the time from when a game ball entering the first starting port 71 enters the entering port 640 to win the first starting port 71. The distribution winning flag 203h is set to ON (S518). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640, the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to be off regardless of whether it is on or off. However, only when it is on. Of course, it may be configured to be set to off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the status determination process (S513), which is one process of the distribution winning process 2 (FIG. 52, S112) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. To do. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this status determination processing (S513).

  In the status determination process (FIG. 53, S513), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S521). It is determined whether the value of the acquired random counter 203p is a status change value (any one of 0 to 39 in this embodiment) (S522). If it is determined that the value is the status change value (S522: Yes), the value of the status selection counter 203m is acquired (S523). The status type is determined from the status selection table 202k (FIG. 44 (a)) based on the acquired values of the status selection counter 203m and the allocated winning ball number counter 203e (S524). A status command is set (generated) based on the determined status type (S525). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired value of the random counter 203p is not the status change value (S522: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, every time a game ball enters the entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64, it is determined by lottery whether the status is changed (determined or updated). It can be changed when triggered.

  In the status selection table 202k, the ratio of the status type to be selected is changed according to the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e. Further, since the pseudo variation pattern of the pseudo symbol selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is set so that the ratio of the pseudo variation pattern type selected by the status type is different, the player can display the variation display. The number of game balls that have entered the current distribution winning device 64 can be predicted based on the pseudo-variation pattern of the pseudo symbols to be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having more fun than getting the special symbol and getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the status selection table 202k also shows the allocation winning ball for the status E that is easily selected in the range of 200 to 255 close to the value at which the value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e wins the first start port 71. Even if the value of the number counter 203e is a low value (for example, a value in the range of 0 to 60), it is configured to be selected. It can be expected that winning 71 will be near.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, the first normal symbol variation process (S113), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first normal symbol variation process (S113). In the first normal symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), the first normal symbol variation display performed in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 and the first blade of the first ordinary electric accessory are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of 64s1.

  In the first normal symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113), first, it is determined whether or not the current present is being hit by the first normal symbol. (S831). The first normal symbol is being hit when the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 displays a win indicating that the first blade 64s1 of the ordinary electric accessory is controlled to open and close. Includes up to the inside. If it is determined that the first normal symbol is being hit (S831: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first normal symbol is not hit (S831: No), it is determined whether the first normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S832). When it is determined that the first normal symbol is in the variable display (S832: Yes), the variation time of the first normal symbol executed in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (S833). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S848 described later before the variable display is started in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the first normal symbol is set with a variation time of 30 seconds for both the winning variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern.

  In the process of S833, if the variation time has not elapsed (S833: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S833, when it is determined that the variation time of the first ordinary symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S833: Yes), the first ordinary symbol display unit of the second symbol display device 83. The stop display of 83a is set (S834). In the process of S834, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S844, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a first normal symbol. Display). On the other hand, if the first normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S847, the first normal symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83 displays “x” symbol. Is set to be stopped (lighted). When the stop display is set by the process of S8034, the variable display in the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the display is stopped in the display mode set by the processes of S844 and S847. The symbol is stopped (lighted) on the first normal symbol display portion 83a of the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current first normal symbol is a win (S835). When it is determined that the current lottery result of the first normal symbol is a win (S835: Yes), opening / closing control start of the first blade 64s1 of the first normal electric accessory is set (836). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first normal symbol this time is out (S835: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S832 that the first normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S832: No), the value of the first normal symbol holding ball counter 203c1 (the holding of the variable display in the first normal symbol is suspended) The number of times M) is acquired (S837).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S838). When it is determined that the value (M1) of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 0 (S838: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not 0 (S838: Yes), the value (M1) of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1. (S839).

  Next, the data stored in the first normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 is shifted (S840). In the process of S840, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first normal symbol hold 1 to the first normal symbol hold 4 in the first normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b1 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, first normal symbol hold 2 → first normal symbol hold 1, first normal symbol hold 3 → first normal symbol hold 2, first normal symbol hold 4 → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first normal symbol hold 3. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the first normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S841).

  The first normal symbol random number table 202c1 (based on the hit determination value in FIG. 42C), a result of the determination of success / failure is acquired (S842), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a win (S843). When it is determined that it is a win (S843: Yes), a display mode of “O”, which is a display mode for winning displayed on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83, is set. (S844) A normal symbol hit variation pattern command (in this embodiment, there is only one type of normal symbol hit variation pattern command, a command indicating the first normal symbol hit) is set (generated).

  The opening time and the number of times of the first blades 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory are set to 0.5 second and 1 time, respectively (S846). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is out (S843: No), it is a display mode at the time of disconnection displayed on the first normal symbol display unit 83a of the second symbol display device 83. The display mode of “×” that is the display mode of is set. The variation time of the first normal symbol is set to 30 seconds.

  As for the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114), the second ordinary symbol variation process (S114) is performed in the second ordinary symbol display unit 83b of the second symbol display apparatus 83 with respect to the first ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 54, S113). The only difference is in controlling the symbol variation display, the opening time of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory, etc., and the same control is executed. The variation time of the second ordinary symbol is also the same as that of the first ordinary symbol, and the same value is set for the opening time and the number of times of the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol are configured to be able to display the variation at the same time. In addition, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric combination and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric combination are configured to be able to perform opening control at the same time.

  Thus, since the opening time and frequency | count of the 1st blade | wing 64s1 of a 1st normal electric combination and the 2nd blade | wing 64s2 of a 2nd normal electric combination are comprised by 0.5 second and 1 time, they open | release. In such a case, the length is set so that one game ball is possible. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls enter the first normal entrance 640s1 or the second normal entrance 640s2 at a time, a ball clogging occurs or an extremely big hit is likely to occur. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol is configured to be relatively long as 30 seconds, it takes time until the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol stop changing. The number of lotteries for the second ordinary symbol is extremely increased, and the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened frequently, and the first start port is extremely increased. It is possible to prevent the player from winning 71 easily.

  Further, since the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 are arranged in series vertically, the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2 pass through at the same time. The first normal symbol and the second normal symbol can be easily changed at the same time. Therefore, since the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol are set to be the same, the determination result is also easily displayed at the same time, and the player can change the display result of the first normal symbol and the second normal symbol. It is easy to see.

  With reference to FIG. 55, the through-gate passing process 2 (S115), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process 2 (S115). In the through-gate passing process 2 (FIG. 55, S115) of the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 and the second normal symbol start port 67s2, and it is determined that it has passed. If so, the process when it passes is executed.

  In the through gate passing process 2 (FIG. 55, S115), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67s1 (S921). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (S921: Yes), the value of the first normal symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S922). It is determined whether or not the acquired value is less than the upper limit of 4 (S923). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S923: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired first normal symbol hold ball counter 203c1, and the added value is the first normal symbol hold. Stored in the ball counter 203c1 (S924). The value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the first ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b1 (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the first normal symbol start port 67s1 (S921: No), the value of the first normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit value 4). ) (S923: No), the process of S926 is executed.

  It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926: Yes), the value of the second normal symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is acquired (S927). It is determined whether the acquired value is less than the upper limit of 4 (S928). When it is determined that the acquired value is less than 4 (S928: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the acquired second normal symbol holding ball counter 203c2, and the added value is the second symbol holding. It is stored in the ball counter 203c2 (S929). The value of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired and stored (stored) in the corresponding reserved area of the second ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b2 (S930). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal symbol start port 67s2 (S926: No), the value of the second normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 is 4 or more (that is, the upper limit of 4). ) (S928: No), this process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 56, the normal entrance process (S116), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described in the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance opening process (S116). In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116) in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first normal entrance 640s1 and the second normal entrance 640s2, the flow of the entered game ball flows down. The time to play is measured, and it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the ball is discharged from the sixth discharge port 650a6 to the eighth discharge port 650a8 or longer than the time to win the first start port 71 After that, a process is performed to correct the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e when one game ball is guided to the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 or one game ball is guided to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8. To do.

  In the normal entrance process (FIG. 56, S116), it is first determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: Yes), the first common power flag 203j1 is set on (S952). Thereafter, the first general power timer 203k1 is set to 0 (S953).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first normal entrance 640s1 (S951: No), it is determined whether the first common power flag 203j1 is on (S954). If it is determined that the first general power flag 203j1 is on (S954: Yes), the value of the first general power timer 203k1 is incremented by 1 and updated (S955). It is determined whether the updated value exceeds the set value (5s in the present embodiment) (S956). If it is determined that the updated value exceeds the set value (S956: Yes), the first common power flag 203j1 is set to OFF (S957). Thereafter, the first distribution correction process is executed (S958). The details of the first distribution correction process (S958) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. However, since the game ball has entered from the first normal entrance 640s1, the value of the distribution winning prize counter 203e. And a shift occurs in each position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the distribution winning device 64, and a process of correcting the shift is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first power transmission flag 203j1 is off (S954: No), when it is determined that the value of the first power transmission timer 203k1 is equal to or less than the set value (S956: No), The process of S959 is executed. In the process of S959, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to ON (S960). Thereafter, the second power transmission timer 203k2 is set to 0 (S961).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the second normal entrance 640s2 (S959: No), it is determined whether the second general power flag 203j2 is on (S962). When it is determined that the second power transmission flag 203j2 is on (S962: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second power transmission timer 203k2 to be updated (S963). It is determined whether or not the value of the second power transmission timer 203k2 exceeds a set value (2s in the present embodiment) (S964). If it is determined that the value of the second general power timer 203k2 exceeds the set value (S964: Yes), the second general power flag 203j2 is set to off (S965). A second distribution correction process is executed (S966). In the second distribution correction process (S966), the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 is changed to the eighth distribution rotation member 64a8 in the process of S972 of the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958). The only difference is that the same processing is executed for the other processing, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, a first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), which is a process of the normal entrance opening process (FIG. 56, S116) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. ). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first distribution correction process (S958).

  In the first distribution correction process (FIG. 57, S958), first, when one game ball is guided to the position of the sixth distribution rotation member 64a6 corresponding to the current value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e. The value of the corresponding distributed winning ball counter 203e is calculated (S971). Here, for example, it is assumed that the value of the current distributed winning ball counter 203e is “100”. Since the position data of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 corresponding to the value “100” of the distribution winning ball counter 203e is “10001100”, the sixth distribution rotating member 64a6 is the first accommodation. The part 64c6 is in a state of facing upward. In this case, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 and is guided to the sixth sorting rotation member 64a6, the game ball enters the first accommodation portion 64c6, and the sixth distribution The rotating member 64a6 rotates leftward to guide the game ball to the sixth guide path 64z12.

  The game ball guided to the sixth guide path 64z12 is guided to the seventh sorting rotation member 64a7. Since the 7th distribution rotation member 64a7 is a position where the 2nd storage part 64d7 turned up, a game ball enters into the 2nd storage part 64d7, rotates to the right direction, and a game ball enters into the 7th guidance way 64z14 To induce. The game ball guided to the seventh guide path guides the game ball to the eighth sorting rotation member 64a8. Since the 8th distribution rotation member 64a8 is in the state where the 2nd storage part 64d8 turned up at this time, a game ball enters into the 2nd storage part 64d8, and rotates to the right direction, and the 8th discharge guide way The game ball is guided to 64z15 and discharged from the eighth discharge port 650a8.

  As a result, when the game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1 when the value of the allocation winning ball counter 203e is 100, the second accommodating portion 64d6 The seventh distribution rotating member 64a7 is changed to a position in which the first accommodating portion c7 is changed, and the eighth distribution rotating member 64a8 is changed to a position in which the first accommodating portion c8 is turned upward. Each position information of the rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 is “10001011”, and it is calculated that the position corresponds to the value 132 of the distributed winning ball counter 203e.

  Next, it is updated to the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e calculated in the process of S971 (S972). The value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is also updated with the same value as the updated distributed winning ball number counter (S973).

  As a result, when a game ball enters from the first normal entrance 640s1, a deviation occurs between the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the position of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8. Based on the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8, the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e is corrected. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the value of the correct distribution winning ball number counter 203e is set. The processing can be performed based on this, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. In addition, the occurrence of the deviation can also suppress a problem that the game is determined as an illegal winning in spite of winning the first starting port 71 in a regular game.

  Also, since the value of the distributed discharge ball counter 203f is also corrected to match the corrected value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e, the distributed winning ball is played even though a normal game is being performed. The difference between the value of the number counter 203e and the value of the distributed discharge ball number counter 203f is an abnormal setting value (10 in this embodiment) that is determined to be abnormal in the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) described later. It is possible to prevent a problem that is determined as above.

  In the present embodiment, the correction of the distribution winning ball counter 203e and the distribution discharging ball counter 203f is performed by calculation. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and there is no game ball in the distribution winning device 64. Is determined, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are detected, and the value of the distribution winning ball counter 203e corresponding to the position is calculated. You may comprise so that it may correct | amend. By configuring in this way, it can be corrected to a more accurate value.

  In the present embodiment, only one ball enters the first normal entrance 640s1 by setting the opening time and the number of times of the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory to 0.5 seconds and once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a game ball cannot directly enter the first normal entrance 640s1 (for example, the first normal entrance 640s1 in a state where the first normal electric accessory is open). A protrusion that restricts the entry of a game ball into the projection, etc.) on the upper surface where the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory is open is a recess capable of holding one game ball. When the first blade 64s1 is closed with the game ball entering the recess (the protruding piece that is restricted by closing is released), the first normal entrance 640s1 enters the recess. It is good also as a structure into which the held game ball enters. By doing in this way, the malfunction which a some game ball enters into 1st normal entrance 640s1 by one opening more reliably can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory and the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory correspond to the first ordinary symbol and the second ordinary symbol, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first blade 64s1 and the second blade 64s2 may be configured to correspond to one normal symbol and be opened simultaneously. Moreover, you may comprise so that the blade | wing opened may be changed with the symbol classification per one normal symbol. By configuring in this way, two blades open at the same time, so that the player can greatly expect the game ball to enter the first normal entrance 64s1 or the second entrance 64s2. Further, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation as to which of the blades will be opened. Therefore, it can suppress getting tired of a game early.

  With reference to FIG. 58, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). The main process (FIG. 58, S1200) of the second embodiment is a jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) instead of the jackpot control process (S1203) with respect to the main process (FIG. 27, S1200) of the first embodiment. However, a distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) is added in place of the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207). In S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S1201 to S1202, S1204 to S1206, and S1208 to S1214 in the first embodiment are executed. When the processing of S1202 is completed, jackpot control processing 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot control process 2 (S1220), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 58, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1220). The jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1200) executes a process of opening and closing the variable winning device 65 depending on the state of the jackpot game. When the jackpot game is over, the jackpot control process 2 of the distribution winning device 64 is performed. The process which sets the 1st-8th distribution rotation member 64a1-64a8 in the position corresponding to the number of entering balls determined by lottery is performed.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot game is started (S1221). When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S1221: Yes), an opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of the jackpot game is set (generated). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S1221: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is being played (S1223). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S1223: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1223: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1224). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1224: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is opened by the operation of the variable winning device 65 (S1225). A round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the newly started round number is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1224: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is satisfied (S1227). Here, the closing condition is whether a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls has been won in the specific winning opening 65a, or 30 seconds have passed since the release. Is set to

  When it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening 65a is established (S1227: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (large opening) is closed by the operation of the variable winning apparatus 65 (S1228). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition is not satisfied (S1229: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229). The ending effect is set when a preset number of rounds is completed.

  When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1229: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1230). It is determined whether the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231). That is, a jackpot type that executes a random setting process in which the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 of the sorting and winning device 64 after the big hit game are set to positions corresponding to the number of balls determined by lottery. It is determined whether it exists.

  When it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot C or jackpot F (S1231: Yes), a random setting process is executed (S1232). Details of the random setting process (S1232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but the first to eighth distribution winning devices 64a1 after the jackpot game from the random number setting table 202m (see FIG. 45 (b)). A process of setting the positions of ~ 64a8 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the executed jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E (S1231: No), this process is terminated.

  With reference to FIG. 60, the random setting process (S1232) which is one process of the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 59, S1220) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this random setting process (S1232).

  In the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232), first, the value of the random counter 203p is acquired (S1241). Based on the value of the acquired random counter 203p, the setting positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined (selected) from the random number setting table 202m (S1242). Based on the determined setting position, the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are respectively set (S1243). The values of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e and the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f are set to values corresponding to the determined setting positions (S1244).

  In this way, when the jackpot game is executed, if the jackpot C or jackpot F, the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to the positions determined by lottery after the jackpot game and corresponding to the number of entered balls. 64a8 is set. Therefore, the player plays a jackpot game in the hope that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are determined by lottery, and if the jackpot C or jackpot F A game can be played in the hope that the set position corresponding to the number of incoming balls will be as large as possible.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the player to determine how many balls have been placed in the distribution winning device 64 after the big hit, the number of balls to be won in the first start port 71 is a little more. A game can be played with the expectation that it may be.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, even during the jackpot game, the player enters the ball entrance 640 of the distribution winning device 64 by being guided by the tapered surface 65s formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65. It has an easy configuration. Therefore, the jackpot C or jackpot D is a big hit of five rounds, so the jackpot game time is short and the number of game balls entering the entrance 640 is small. Therefore, if the player is a big hit of 5 rounds, the player strongly expects that it is a big hit C for which the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit E or a big hit F of 16 rounds, a certain amount of game balls will enter the entrance 640. For example, even if it is not a big hit F, It is possible to reduce the number of balls required up to the number of balls to be won at one start port 71. Therefore, the player can obtain the next jackpot at an early stage and can suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the random number setting table 202m, when the value of the random counter 202p meets 90 to 99, it is set when the number of entered balls is 255. In this case, the game ball wins the first starting port 71, and a continuous jackpot can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can obtain more game balls in a shorter time, and the game preference can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232) according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery based on the prize winning is made after winning the jackpot game. May be configured to determine whether to execute the random setting process (FIG. 60, S1232). By configuring in this way, the player himself can taste the feeling that the lottery has been performed, and the enjoyment in the jackpot game can be increased.

  With reference to FIG. 61, the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) which is one process of the main process (S1200) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the distribution error processing 2 (S1320). In the distribution error process 2 (FIG. 61, S1320) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1321 to S1322 and S1324 to S1326 are added to the distribution error process (FIG. 28, S1207) of the first embodiment. Yes. In S1323, S1327 to S1332 in the second embodiment, the same processes as S1301 to S1307 in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1321, it is determined whether the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to on (S1321). If it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1321: Yes), the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored in the distribution position storage area 203q. It is discriminated whether it matches the existing position data (position information) (S1322). If it is determined that they match (S1322: Yes), an error notification command is set (S1323). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the positions of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to the eighth sorting rotating member 64a8 and the values of the sorting position storage area 203q do not match (S1322: No), S1327. The process is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution maintaining flag 203r is off (S1321: No), the process of S1324 is executed. In the processing of S1324, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning ball number counter 203e matches the value of the distribution discharge ball number counter 203f (that is, the difference between the values is 0) (S1324). If it is determined that they match (that is, the difference is 0) (S1324: Yes), the distribution maintaining flag 203r is set to ON (S1325). Thereafter, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are stored as position data (position information) in the distribution position storage area 203q. This position data is stored in the same manner as the position data of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 in the random number setting table 202m shown in FIG. Note that the processing of S1327 to S1332 is the same processing as the distribution error processing 2 (FIG. 28, S1207) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when it is determined that the game ball is not flowing down in the distribution winning device 64, the positions of the first to eighth distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 at that time are stored. In addition, by checking the position until a new game ball enters the distribution winning device 64, the first to first in the state where the game ball has not won the distribution winning device 64. It is possible to monitor whether the eight distribution rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 are rotated. Therefore, the fraudulent movement of the first to eighth sorting rotating members 64a1 to 64a8 from the outside can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegally winning at the first start port 71 and reduce damage caused by fraud.

  With reference to FIG. 62, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). The main process (FIG. 62, S1600) of the second embodiment is a variable display setting process 2 instead of the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) as compared to the main process (FIG. 30, S1600) of the first embodiment. (FIG. 64, S1630) is replaced with the pseudo variation process (FIG. 34, S1612), and the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640) is replaced with the background selection process (FIG. 35, S1613). 66, S1650) is replaced with command determination processing (FIG. 31, S1614), and command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is added. The processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1610 and S1615 to S1620 in the first embodiment. For the sake of convenience, the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) executed after the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650) will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 63, the command determination process 2 (S1660) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1660). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) of the second embodiment replaces the processes of S1707 to S1712 with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) of the first embodiment. Has been added. The processes from S1721 to S1726 and S1731 to S1735 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes from S1701 to S1706 and S1713 to S1717 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S1724, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1724; No), the process of S1727 is executed. In the process of S1727, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1727). When it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command is received (S1727: Yes), the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S1728).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol hit variation pattern command has not been received (S1727: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1729). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S1729: Yes), the status type is extracted from the received status command and stored in the secondary status storage area 223h (S1730). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1729: No), the process of S1731 is executed. Since each process from S1731 to S1735 is the same process as the command determination process (FIG. 31, S1614) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variable display setting process 2 (S1630) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 64, S1630) of the second embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, in place of each process of S1903 to S1907, of S1923 to S1928. Each process has been added. The processes from S1921 to S1922 and S1929 to S1935 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes from S1901 to S1902 and S1908 to S1912 in the first embodiment.

  When the process of S1922 is executed, the process of S1923 is executed. In the process of S1923, it is determined whether any of the precursor A to precursor C pseudo-variation patterns is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1923). When it is determined that any of the precursor A to C pseudo-variation patterns is not variably displayed (S1923: No), the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1723 of the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1660) is acquired. (S1924). The variation pattern selected at this time is a variation display mode in which variation display of a special symbol as shown in FIG. The detailed contents are the same as those already described in the first embodiment, and will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the precursor A to C pseudo-variation patterns is variably displayed (S1923: Yes), the type of the symptom pseudo-variation pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is determined what it is (S1925). When it is determined that the variation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor A pseudo variation pattern, the continuation A variation pattern is acquired as the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1926).

  Here, the precursor A pseudo variation pattern and the continuation A variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo-sign precursor A fluctuation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the fluctuation display at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, and an image of the hero climbing toward a high mountain is displayed (upper diagram in FIG. 46). After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol as it is, and the hero An image that climbs up to the top of the mountain is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (a), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heaven!” Is displayed below it. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor A simulated variation pattern, when the variation display of the switching A variation pattern does not start even after the variation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the top of the mountain and is different from the pseudo symbols on the left and right. The middle symbol stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern, the continuation B fluctuation pattern is acquired as a special symbol fluctuation pattern (dynamic display mode) (S1927).

  Here, the precursor B pseudo fluctuation pattern and the continuous B fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the sign B variation pattern of the pseudo symbol, the left, middle, and right pseudo symbols (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the variation at high speed in ascending order (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left, the hero is displayed, and an image in which the hero jumps toward the sky is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous B variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol as it is, and the hero An image that has reached the top of the cloud is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 46 (b), the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and “becoming the heavens !!” is displayed below the special symbol. Characters are displayed. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor B pseudo variation pattern, when the variation display of the switching b variation pattern is not started even after the variation time has elapsed, the main character does not reach the cloud, and the middle symbol is different from the left and right pseudo symbols. Stops and the variable display ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern that is variably displayed is the precursor C pseudo variation pattern, the continuous C variation pattern is acquired as the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the special symbol (S1928).

  Here, the precursor C pseudo variation pattern and the continuous C variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In the pseudo-sign precursor C variation pattern, the left, middle, and right pseudo-patterns (numbers 1 to 9 in the present embodiment) start to display the variation in ascending order at high speed (not shown). Next, the symbols with the same numbers on the left and right pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed, and the “reach” sound is output from the sound output device 226. Then, the pseudo symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and an image of the closed door is displayed. An image in which the closed door repeats opening and closing slightly is displayed. After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol is started with the continuous A variation pattern, the pseudo symbol displayed on the upper left is replaced as the special symbol and closed. An image with the door open is displayed. After that, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 47, the special symbol displayed at the upper left in the reach state is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “arrival to heaven !!” are displayed below it. Is done. Thereafter, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “777”, and is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for notifying that a big hit has been made. On the other hand, in the precursor C simulated variation pattern, if the variation display of the switching C variation pattern is not started even after the variation time has elapsed, the pseudo doors that are different from the left and right pseudo symbols are left without being opened. The middle symbol stops at the symbol and the variable display ends.

  Since each process from S1929 to S1935 is the same as the process already described in the variable display setting process (FIG. 33, S1611) of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the pseudo fluctuation process 2 (S1640) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation process 2 (S1640).

  In the pseudo variation process 2 (FIG. 65, S1640), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S2021). If it is determined that the special symbol is variably displayed (S2021: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (2021: No), it is determined whether the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022). If it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is set to ON (S2022: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol variation is being displayed (S2023). When it is determined that the pseudo symbol variation is being displayed (S2023: Yes), the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern is set, and the normal variation flag 223i is set to OFF (S2024).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48A, the interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern varies as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 48A when the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The displayed pseudo symbol is reduced below the third symbol display device 81 and is variably displayed. The letters “Emergency News Shortcut !!” are displayed above the pseudo symbol, and the first ordinary electric accessory is displayed. The first blade 64s1 or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened, and the player enters a state where the game ball enters the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. To be notified.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is being stopped (S2023: No), the normal normal pseudo variation pattern is set and the normal variation flag 223i is set to OFF (S2025).

  Here, the normal pseudo variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal pseudo variation pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the characters “attack chance” are displayed, and the characters “Aim at the right chucker!” Are displayed. The first blade 64s1 of the first ordinary electric accessory or the second blade 64s2 of the second ordinary electric accessory is opened to allow a game ball to enter the first ordinary entrance 640s1 or the second ordinary entrance 640s2. Informs that it will be in a state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal variation flag 223i is off (S2022: No), it is determined whether the pseudo symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2026). Here, the pseudo symbol variation display includes the fact that the variation is displayed in an interrupt normal pseudo variation pattern and a normal ordinary pseudo variation pattern. If it is determined that the pseudo symbol is in a variable display (S2026: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed (S2026: No), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2027). A pseudo variation pattern of a pseudo symbol is selected from the pseudo variation table 222a (see FIG. 44B) based on the acquired value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a and the status type (status information) stored in the sub status storage area 223h. (S2028). Based on the selected (set) pseudo fluctuation pattern, a display pseudo fluctuation pattern command is set (generated).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44B, the pseudo variation table 222a is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol corresponding to the status type. Specifically, in status E, the precursor C pseudo-variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a, and status D, status C, status B, and status A are sequentially arranged in this order. The selection ratio is set to be low in the precursor C pseudo fluctuation pattern. In addition, for the precursor B fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected at the time of status C is set to be high, and for the precursor A fluctuation pattern, the ratio that is most selected at the time of status B is configured to be the highest. ing.

  In addition, each status is set by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 so that the proportion selected according to the value in the distributed winning ball counter 203e is different. Therefore, depending on the selection frequency of the variation pattern of the selected pseudo symbol It is configured to be able to predict the number of game balls won in the current distribution winning device 64.

  Therefore, the more skilled the game is, the more predictable the number of game balls that have won the distribution winning device 64 can be from a pseudo-pattern variation pattern. Therefore, not only the special symbol jackpot but also the enjoyment of prediction can be obtained, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage. Further, the more the game is played, the more the pachinko machine 10 can determine the state, and the player can play the game for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol hit variation pattern is received, the predetermined notification mode is divided and displayed in the pseudo symbol state on the pseudo symbol. If a pseudo-symbol variation pattern is received and a pseudo-symbol is being displayed, the pseudo-symbol is stopped in a specific display mode (for example, a chance such as 341), and a normal symbol is displayed to the player. You may comprise so that you may alert | win. By configuring in this way, the player can be more interested in pseudo-variable display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, background selection process 2 (S1650), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 62, S1600) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the background selection process 2 (S1650).

In the background selection process 2 (FIG. 66, S1650), first, the value of the background change counter 223j is acquired (S2121). It is determined whether the acquired value of the background change counter 223j is greater than 50, that is, 51 or more (S2122). When it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 51 or more (S2122: Yes), the value of the pseudo variation selection counter 223a is acquired (S2123). A background pattern (background image type) is selected (determined) from the background selection table 222b based on the obtained status type (status information) stored in the pseudo-variation selection counter 223a and the sub status storage area 223h (S2124). . A display background command based on the selected background pattern is set (generated). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223j is 50 or less (S2122: No), this process is terminated.

  In this way, whether or not to change the background image is determined by lottery, so that the background image can be changed with a random opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting lost in the game.

  In addition, since the background pattern is set so that the ratio to be selected based on the status type is different, the player enters the current distribution winning device 64 according to the frequency of the displayed background pattern. The number can be predicted.

  Further, the status E that is easy to be selected with a large value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is also selected when the value of the distributed winning ball counter 203e is relatively small (for example, 10). Therefore, in actuality, even if there are few game balls won in the distribution winning device 64, with the expectation that it will become the number of balls that will be won in the first start port 71 in a short time. A game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the number of game balls to be won at the first start opening 71 enters the sorting prize winning device 64.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It may be provided in the machine 10 so that the number of game balls that have entered the entrance 640 is output to the pachinko machine 10 outside. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the number of game balls won in the current distribution prize winning device 64 at the judgment of the game store. Therefore, it is possible to make more players visit the store by notifying the game store of information that is advantageous to the player.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the third flow path for the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means And a second flow path switching means that alternately distributes between the second flow path and the fourth flow path, and a entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, whether or not to determine whether or not the game is appropriate, and whether or not the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination means is true, A gaming machine A1 having a privilege game execution means to be given.

  The gaming machine A1 has the following effects. That is, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching member are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early.

  The gaming machine A1 has game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switch means, and the game ball distribution means is a distribution that allows game balls to enter. A ball entrance, a guide path for guiding the game ball entered from the entrance to the first flow path switching means, and the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the first flow path switching means are discharged. And a second discharge port for discharging the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the game ball distribution means having the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game balls that have entered from the distribution entrance port where the game balls can enter are the first flow paths. It is guided to the switching means by a taxiway. The game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means are discharged from the first discharge port. Further, the game balls distributed to the third flow path by the second flow path switching means are discharged through the second discharge port. This makes it easy for the player to distribute the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path where the game balls are not inserted into the entrance opening due to the game balls being discharged from the first exit or the second exit. Can be recognized. Therefore, the progress of the game can be easily recognized without concentrating on whether or not the player has entered the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, to the special entrance where the success / failure determination unit executes the success / failure determination based on the entrance of a game ball different from the entrance, and in the normal gaming state, to the special entrance Entry restriction that makes it difficult to enter the game ball and sets the game ball to the special entrance more easily than in the normal game state in a special game state different from the normal game state And a bonus game type determining means for determining a normal bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and a special bonus game that sets the gaming status after the bonus game to the special gaming state; The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the special entrance slot in the special gaming state is configured such that a game ball can enter more easily than the entrance slot.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the game ball enters a special entrance different from the entrance, the success / failure determination unit executes the determination of success / failure. In the normal game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the special entrance, and in the special game state different from the normal game state, the game ball enters the special entrance than in the normal game state It is easily set by the entrance restriction means. The bonus game type determining means determines the normal bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the normal gaming state and the special bonus game that sets the gaming state after the bonus game to the special gaming state. In the special game state, the special entrance is configured such that the game ball can enter more easily than the entrance. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a game ball enters the entrance for every predetermined number of times and the winning / no-go determination is executed. However, when entering the special game state, the game ball enters the special entrance more easily. Since a ball is possible, an efficient game can be provided. Therefore, the player can play different games between the normal game state and the special game state, and can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are a first storage section that can receive a game ball and a first storage section that can receive a game ball. A different second storage portion, the first storage portion, and the second storage portion are provided, and rotate by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, so that the second flow path or the fourth flow path The game balls are distributed to the first housing part and rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first housing part, and the game balls are rotated by receiving the game balls in the first housing part at the first position. Rotating means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotating the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second storage portion; and at the first position or the second position, Before receiving the sphere in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, the first position is changed from the first position. Position or gaming machine the pivot means from the second position to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  An initial control means for executing either one of an initialization control process for initializing a gaming machine when power is turned on to the gaming machine and an initial control process for setting to a state immediately before the power is turned off; In a gaming machine having a normal control means for executing a normal control process for executing a normal game after the control process or the initial control process is executed, the game ball is connected to the first flow path and the second flow First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path The second flow path switching means, the entrance where a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means can enter, and that the game ball has entered the entrance , Whether or not to determine whether or not the game is successful, and whether or not the game is successful On the basis of the fact that the fixed result is a win, at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means in the bonus game execution means for giving a bonus game to the player, and in the initialization control process And an initial switching setting means for setting the game ball in a state where it can be distributed to a predetermined flow path.

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. In other words, when the gaming machine is turned on, either the initialization control process for initializing the gaming machine or the initial control process for setting the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed by the initial control means. After the initialization control process and the initial control process are executed, a normal control process for executing a normal game is executed by the normal control means. The game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. By the initialization control process, at least one of the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit is set by the initial switching setting unit so that the game balls can be distributed to a predetermined channel. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early. In addition, when the gaming machine is initialized, the flow path to which the game balls are distributed is set to be a predetermined flow path, so that the game balls enter the entrance from the initial state. It is possible to set the number of game balls required for the game to a certain level or more. Therefore, the difference between the advantages and disadvantages of each gaming machine can be reduced by setting the initial state.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the first storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion and distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. The first storage portion is rotated to a first position where the game ball can be received, and the first storage portion is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first storage portion at the first position. Rotating means for allocating the game balls to the three flow paths and rotating the game balls to a second position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion; and at the first position or the second position, From the first position to the second position or the second position before being received in the receiving part or the second receiving part The rotation means to the first position is characterized in that having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting from the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. The game ball is rotated by receiving the game ball, and the received game ball is distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path, and is rotated to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second storage portion. It is rotated. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  In the gaming machine B2, the initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to the first position, the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit are set to the first position by the initial switching setting unit. It is possible to set the number of game balls required to be distributed to the flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means and enter the ball entrance to the maximum. Therefore, by initializing the gaming machine, the setting between the gaming machines can be made equal, and the game can be damaged by being put into the entrance early and being given a jackpot early. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, an initial time for determining whether the first channel switching unit and the second channel switching unit set by the initial switching setting unit are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. Switching position determination means, and the previous initial switching setting means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, respectively, based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determination means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the initial switching position determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means set by the initial switching setting means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. Based on the setting determined by the initial switching position determining means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively set by the initial switching setting means. As a result, when the gaming machine is initialized, the setting of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means is set randomly each time in each gaming machine. The setting of the first flow path switching means or the second flow path switching means can be easily set differently. Therefore, even if the player is an initialized gaming machine, the player can select a gaming machine with a pleasure of selecting a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player from a plurality of gaming machines. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of playing more games.

  First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path, and the third flow path for the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means And a second flow path switching means that alternately distributes between the second flow path and the fourth flow path, and a entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, whether or not to determine whether or not the game is appropriate, and whether or not the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination means is true, A state in which the game balls are distributed to which flow path is set for at least one of the award game execution means to be given and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the bonus game ends. And a flow path determining means for determining whether or not to play the game machine. 1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means. Therefore, a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the first flow path switching means enter the entrance, and the player determines how many game balls have been distributed by the first flow path switching means. It can be enjoyed and it can suppress getting tired of games early. In addition, after the bonus game is over, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly until the game balls enter the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. It can be expected. Therefore, more enjoyment can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the second storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, and the game ball is placed in the second flow path or the fourth flow path. It distributes and rotates to the 1st position which can receive a game ball in the 1st storage part, and it rotates by receiving the game ball in the 1st storage part in the 1st position. Rotating means that distributes the game balls to the third flow path and rotates the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion, and the game balls are moved to the second position in the first position or the second position. The first position to the second position or the second position Gaming machine C2, wherein said rotating means to the first position from the position in which having a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  In the gaming machine C2, the flow path determining means sets the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to either the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. The rotation means is an autonomous rotation that rotates the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to the positions determined by the flow path determination means, respectively. A gaming machine C3 having means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on a predetermined lottery, the flow path determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means at the positions determined by the flow path determination means. Thereby, the setting after the privilege game of a 1st flow path switching means and a 2nd flow path switching means can be performed easily. Therefore, the process at the end of the bonus game can be reduced, and the time until the normal game is executed after the bonus game can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first flow path switching unit and the first flow path switching unit according to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching unit before the game ball enters the entrance port. A setting table in which settings for each of the second flow path switching means are stored, and the flow path determination means is necessary for causing a game ball to enter the entrance according to the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means is determined, and the settings of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are determined from the setting table based on the number of game balls. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that each is determined.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means is made in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game ball into the entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game balls into the entrance is determined, and from the setting table, the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second channel switching unit is determined by the channel determining unit. Accordingly, the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member can be easily set in accordance with the number of game balls required to enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after executing the privilege game.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result or the game information relating to the game and the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is successful are displayed on the display means A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player, the game machine having a sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize winning means A distribution entrance port through which game balls can enter into the prize winning means, and game balls that enter the distribution entrance port are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the two flow paths into a third flow path and a fourth flow path that leads to the entrance hole, and in the distribution prize winning means And a game information determination means for determining the game information to be displayed on the display means based on the count value of the distribution prize counting means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The identification information or game information related to the game is displayed on the display means based on the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means alternately flow into the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The route is switched by the path switching means. The number of game balls in the distribution prize winning means is counted by the distribution prize counting means. The game information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the game information determination means based on the count value of the distribution winning prize counting means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. In addition, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, game balls will enter the entrance, so how long the player can enter the entrance, It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the distribution winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. In addition, since the game information displayed on the display means is determined by the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means, the game information is displayed at random opportunities, and the player can play the game Can be prevented from being bored.

  In the gaming machine D1, the number-of-entry counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance, and the game information determining means are configured such that the count value of the in-distribution prize counting means is a predetermined count value. The game machine D2 is characterized in that one game information is determined from a plurality of different types of game information based on a count value of the number-of-entry counting means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance is counted by the entrance number counting means. When the count value of the distribution prize counting means is a predetermined count value, one game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution prize counting means among a plurality of different types of game information. Determined by means. As a result, the game information is determined based on the count value of the distribution winning award counting means, so the player is notified of information regarding the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means according to the determined game information. Can do. Therefore, the player determines the number of game balls to be entered into the allocation winning means required before entering the entrance from the information on the number of game balls won in the allocation winning means from the game information. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is information related to background information on which the identification information is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming information is composed of information related to background information of the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Even when playing, the game information can be confirmed, and information about the game can be obtained.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are a first storage unit that can receive a game ball and a first storage unit that can receive a game ball. A different second storage portion, the first storage portion, and the second storage portion are provided, and rotate by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, so that the second flow path or the fourth flow path The game balls are distributed to the first housing part and rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first housing part, and the game balls are rotated by receiving the game balls in the first housing part at the first position. Rotating means for distributing the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotating the game balls to the second position where the game balls can be received in the second storage portion; and at the first position or the second position, Before the ball is received in the first receiving part or the second receiving part, Gaming machine and said second said rotating means and position or from the second position to the first position are those having a a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. To rotate. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, When the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result or the game information relating to the game and the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is successful are displayed on the display means A gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player, the game machine having a sorting prize winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, wherein the sorting prize winning means A distribution entrance port through which game balls can enter into the prize winning means, and game balls that enter the distribution entrance port are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path. The first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the two flow paths into a third flow path and a fourth flow path that guides the game balls to the entrance opening; In response to the establishment of the number-of-balls counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game and the condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information that is one of the game information, A pseudo-dynamic display mode determining unit that determines one pseudo-dynamic display mode among the dynamic display modes of the plurality of pseudo-identification information based on the count value of the entry ball number counting unit; A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. The identification information or game information related to the game is displayed on the display means based on the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game ball to the entrance gate, the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance where the game ball can enter the distribution winning means is guided out of the distribution winning means. The flow path and the second flow path are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. A game ball distributed to the second flow path by the second flow path switching means by the first flow path switching means is guided to the third flow path and the ball entrance where the game balls are guided out of the distribution winning means. Alternating with the flow path, the second flow path switching means distributes them. The count value is updated by the number-of-entry counting means based on the game ball entering the distribution entrance. Triggered by the establishment of a condition for starting dynamic display of pseudo-identification information that is one of game information, one of a plurality of pseudo-identification information dynamic display modes based on the count value of the number-of-entry counting means The pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo dynamic display mode determination means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Moreover, since the dynamic display mode of the pseudo identification information, which is one of the game information, is determined and dynamically displayed based on the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means, the pseudo dynamic display mode Thus, the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means can be determined by the player. Therefore, even when a game ball does not enter the entrance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and getting bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the pseudo dynamic display mode determination means sets the pseudo dynamic display mode as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo identification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the distribution entrance. A gaming machine E2 that is to be determined.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the pseudo-dynamic display mode is determined by the pseudo-dynamic display mode determination means as a condition for starting the dynamic display of the pseudo-identification information that the game ball has entered the distribution entrance, Since dynamic display is started in the pseudo-dynamic display mode at the timing when a game ball enters the distribution winning means, the timing at which the pseudo-dynamic display mode dynamically displays can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize at which timing the pseudo dynamic display mode is based on what has entered the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately recognize the number of game balls that have entered the distribution winning means than the pseudo dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is displayed while the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means Has a display switching means for switching the pseudo-dynamic display mode to the display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means and the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is displayed, the pseudo dynamic display mode is identified. It is switched to display of information by the display switching means. Therefore, even if the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the display can be switched to the display of the identification information, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of the identification information.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a dynamic identification display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information as one dynamic identification display mode among a plurality of dynamic identification display modes; When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode determining means determines a dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo-dynamic display mode, 2. When the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode is determined when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display. The gaming machine E4 according to any one of 3 to 4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, among the plurality of dynamic identification display modes, the dynamic identification display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. When the pseudo dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the dynamic identification display mode corresponding to the dynamically displayed pseudo dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determining means. On the other hand, when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display, a dedicated dynamic identification display mode when the pseudo-dynamic display mode is non-dynamic display is determined by the dynamic identification display mode determination means. The As a result, the dynamic identification display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamically displayed pseudo dynamic display mode, so that the player feels unnatural to switch from the pseudo dynamic display mode to the dynamic identification display mode. Can be prevented. Thus, the player can draw attention to the pseudo-dynamic display mode by identifying the content of the pseudo-dynamic display mode as a dynamic display linked to the dynamic identification display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance The distribution winning means has a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and the game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port in the first flow path. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means movable alternately between a first position for distribution and a second position for distribution to the second flow path; and the second flow by the first flow path switching means. A fourth position for guiding the game ball distributed to the road to the third position where the game ball is distributed to the third flow path and the entrance. A second flow path switching unit having a second distribution movable unit that is alternately movable to a fourth position that is distributed to the road, and a position determination unit that determines at least the position of the second distribution movable unit Position monitoring means for determining whether the position is a normal position based on the position with the second distribution movable means determined by the position determination means when a game ball enters the entrance The gaming machine F1 includes an abnormality process executing unit that executes an abnormality process when the position monitoring unit determines that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the gaming machine F1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the first position at which the game balls that enter the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. And a first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means that is alternately movable to a second position that is distributed to the second flow path. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port The distribution is performed by the second flow path switching unit having the second distribution movable unit that is movable alternately. The position of the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position monitoring means determines whether it is a normal position based on the position of the second position movable means determined by the position determination means. Then, when the position monitoring unit determines that there is an abnormality, the abnormality process is executed by the abnormality process execution unit. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Further, when a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined based on the position of the second displacing movable means whether it is an abnormal entry, so that illegal entry can be suppressed. Therefore, damage caused by illegally entering the entrance can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters the entrance, if the game ball enters the distribution entrance later than the entered game ball, There is subsequent position determining means for determining that the game ball that has entered moves the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, and the position monitoring means has a game ball at the entrance. A gaming machine F2, which, when entering a ball, determines whether the position is a normal position based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball enters the entrance gate, if a game ball enters the distribution entrance after the entered game ball, the game ball entered after that The subsequent position determining means determines that the first distribution moving means and the second distribution moving means are moved. When a game ball enters the entrance, the position determination unit determines whether the position is a normal position based on the determination result of the subsequent position determination unit. Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance, it can be more accurately determined whether or not the entrance into the entrance by normal game. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, an allocation winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the fourth flow path for guiding the game, The number-of-entrance counting means for updating the count value based on the fact that the ball has entered the game ball and the game ball whose count value is distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means If the value indicates that the game ball has reached the count value, the measuring means for measuring the time after the game ball passed through the distribution entrance, and the game ball entered the entrance And determining whether or not the measurement time of the measuring means is within the effective time, and if it is outside the effective period, the abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process for abnormal entry A gaming machine G1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The count value is updated by the number-of-entry counting means based on the game ball entering the distribution entrance. When the count value is a value indicating that a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means has entered, the game ball that becomes the count value is allocated. The time after passing through the ball opening is measured by the measuring means. When a game ball enters the entrance, it is determined whether the measurement time of the measuring means is within the effective time. If it is outside the effective period, abnormal processing for abnormal entry is monitored for abnormal entry. Executed by means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. In addition, when a game ball enters the entrance, if it is determined that it has entered outside the effective time, abnormal processing as an abnormal entrance is executed, so the entrance to the entrance due to fraud Can reduce the damage.

  In the gaming machine G1, the abnormal entry monitoring means detects an abnormality with respect to the abnormal entry when a game ball does not enter the entrance even after the effective period of time measured by the measurement means elapses. A gaming machine G2 that executes processing.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, even if the valid period of the measurement time by the measuring means has passed, if the game ball does not enter the entrance, the abnormal entry monitoring means executes an abnormal process for the abnormal entrance. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball that will enter the entrance gate has entered the distribution entrance entrance, even if the effective period has passed, Since the abnormal process is executed, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has been entered into the distribution winning means due to fraud, or that a ball is jammed in the distribution winning means due to a problem. Therefore, damage caused by fraud or a player's disadvantage due to malfunction can be detected and improved at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the abnormal entry monitoring means has a value that indicates that the count value has entered a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth passage by the second passage switching means. A gaming machine G3, which is not discriminated and executes an abnormal process for the abnormal entry when a game ball enters the entrance with the measuring means in a non-timed state. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the count value of the number-of-entrance counting means is not determined to be a value indicating that a game ball that will be distributed to the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means is entered, and the measurement means is not If a game ball enters the entrance when it is in the timekeeping state, abnormal processing for abnormal entrance is executed by the abnormal entrance monitoring means. As a result, even when a ball is entered when it is not a condition to enter the entrance, it is processed as an abnormal entry, so that it is possible to detect fraud and defects at an early stage. Therefore, the game can be performed normally by detecting at an early stage a fraud in which a ball is illegally detected by a radio wave or the like, or a malfunction due to a ball jam or the like.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately allocating to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and entering the distribution ball opening Based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, a number-of-entry counting means for counting the number of gaming balls, a number-of-ejecting ball counting means for counting the number of gaming balls derived from the first flow path or the third flow path, When it is determined that there is a difference between the comparison value by the comparison means for comparing the count value of the number-of-balls counting means and the count value of the number-of-balls counting means, and the comparison result by the comparison means is not less than a predetermined abnormal number In addition, the gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising abnormal entry monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as abnormal entry.

  According to the gaming machine H1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The number of game balls that have entered the distribution entrance is counted by the entrance number counting means. Also, the number of game balls guided from the first flow path or the third flow path is counted by the discharged ball number counting means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, the count value of the number-of-balls counting means and the count value of the number-of-balls counting means are compared by the comparison means. When it is determined that the comparison result by the comparison means has a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined number of abnormalities, the abnormal processing as abnormal entry is executed by the abnormal entry monitoring means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Also, since the difference between the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means and the discharged game ball is determined based on the establishment of a predetermined opportunity, it is determined whether or not the distribution winning means has been illegally entered. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such that the game winning ball is illegally made to enter the game winning prize means from other than the game entrance ball opening. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance And the distribution winning means includes a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and a game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port as a first flow path. First flow path switching means for alternately distributing to the second flow path, and game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the entrance Second flow path switching means for alternately allocating to the fourth flow path for guiding the ball, and entering the distribution ball opening The number of entered balls is added based on the fact that the game ball is guided from the first flow path or the third flow path, and based on the fact that the number of entered balls is subtracted from the number of entered balls. The counting means for counting the number of game balls being played, and the abnormal counting when the count value of the counting means during counting is determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number And an abnormal entrance monitoring means for executing an abnormal process as a gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. The number of entered balls is added based on having entered the distribution entrance, and the number of entered balls is subtracted from the number of entered balls based on the guidance of the game ball from the first channel or the third channel. The number of game balls entering the prize winning means is counted by the counting means during entering. When it is determined that the count value of the counting means during entering is greater than or equal to a predetermined abnormal number or less than the normal number, abnormal processing as abnormal entering is executed by the abnormal entering monitoring means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to provide more gaming fun. Further, the game balls being entered are counted in the distribution winning means, and it is determined whether the count value is equal to or greater than the abnormal number or less than the normal number, thereby determining whether or not the distribution winning means is illegally entered. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud such that the game winning ball is illegally made to enter the game winning prize means from other than the game entrance ball opening. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for granting a bonus to a player based on a winning / failed determination result, a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance The distribution winning means has a distribution inlet port through which a game ball can enter the distribution winning means, and the game ball that has entered the distribution inlet port in the first flow path. A first flow path switching means having a first distribution moving means movable alternately between a first position to be distributed and a second position to be distributed to the second flow path; and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. A fourth position where the game balls distributed to the flow path are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth flow path. And a second flow path switching means having a second flow path moving means that are alternately movable, and determining positional information of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, respectively. Position determination means, distribution ball determination means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the distribution winning means, and game balls are placed in the distribution winning means by the distribution ball determination means. The position determined by the position determining means as an abnormal operation when the position of at least one of the first distributing movable means and the second distributing movable means is changed in a state where it is determined that the ball has not entered. A game characterized by comprising: an abnormal operation determining means for determining based on information; and an abnormal process executing means for executing an abnormal process when the abnormal operation determining means determines that the abnormal operation has occurred. Machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance where the game balls can enter the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. The first distribution moving means of the first flow path switching means is alternately moved to the position and the second position to be distributed to the second flow path, so that the distribution is performed. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port Allocation is performed by alternately moving the second distribution moving means of the second flow path switching means. Position information indicating the positions of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means is determined by the position determination means. During the state in which it is determined that the game ball has not entered the distribution winning means by the distribution ball determining means for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the distribution winning means, the first distribution It is determined by the abnormality determining means based on the position information determined by the position determining means that an abnormal operation is that the position of at least one of the movable means and the second distributing movable means is variable. When it is determined that the abnormal operation is performed by the abnormality determination means, the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing execution means. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, when the game ball has not entered the distribution winning means and the position is changed to at least one of the first distribution movable means and the second distribution movable means, abnormal processing is performed as an abnormal operation. Since it is executed, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of illegally operating the distribution winning means and illegally entering the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first flow path switching unit and the second flow path switching unit are different from the first storage unit that can receive game balls and the first storage unit that can receive game balls. And the first storage portion and the second storage portion are rotated by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion and distribute the game ball to the second flow path or the fourth flow path. The first storage portion rotates to the first position or the third position where the game ball can be received, and the first storage portion receives the game ball at the first position or the third position. A rotating means that moves and distributes the game balls to the first flow path or the third flow path and rotates the game balls to the second position or the fourth position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion; In the first position or the second position, the game ball is moved to the first housing part or the second position. First rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the turning means from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before being received by the container; and the third In the position or the fourth position, the turning means from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. And a second turning restricting means for restricting the turning of the gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first position or the third position where the game balls can be received in the first housing portion, and the first position or the third position. The game ball can be rotated by receiving the game ball into the first housing portion at a position, and the received game ball can be distributed to the first flow path or the third flow path so that the game ball can be received in the second storage section. It is rotated by the rotation means to the second position or the fourth position. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the first rotation regulating means. Further, in the third position or the fourth position, the rotating means rotates from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position before the game ball is received in the first storage part or the second storage part. This is restricted by the second rotation restricting means. As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, or the third position and the fourth position, so that the game balls can be reliably swung alternately. Can be divided. Further, the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position, from the third position to the fourth position or from the fourth position to the third position, the game ball is accommodated in the first accommodation portion or the second accommodation. Since it is regulated when the ball is not entering the part, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being continuously received in the same storage part. Therefore, it is possible to distribute game balls alternately more reliably.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, Based on the determination result, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game for giving the bonus to the player, the open state capable of guiding the game ball to the inside, and guiding the game ball to the inside A determination condition for determining whether the movable piece can be changed from the closed state to the open state based on the movable piece movable to a closed state that makes it difficult to move and the game ball entering or passing through. The lottery determination means for executing the lottery for changing the movable piece from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of the determination condition, the specific entrance that is determined to be satisfied, and the lottery determination means If judged And a movable means for moving the movable piece from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time, the game machine further comprising a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance. The prize-winning means includes a sort-in slot that allows a game ball to enter the sort-out prize means, and a game ball that has entered the sort-in prize slot into the first channel and the second channel. First flow path switching means that distributes alternately, and a second flow that alternately distributes the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path A path switching means, and an introduction guiding path for guiding a game ball to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means from the outside of the distribution winning means, At the guide port communicating with the outside of the distribution winning means, the movable piece closes the guide port in the closed state and plays in the open state. Gaming machine J1, wherein those that are configured provided to direct the ball into the introduction guide path game balls.

  According to the gaming machine J1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. Judgment criteria for determining whether or not the movable piece that can be moved between an open state in which the game ball can be guided and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to guide is variable is based on the game ball entering the specific entrance The lottery is executed by the lottery determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. When it is determined that the lottery result is a win, the movable piece is moved from the closed state to the open state by a movable unit for a predetermined time. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance that can enter the game balls in the distribution winning means are the first flow path and the second flow path. Are alternately distributed by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are alternately distributed by the second flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path guided to the entrance. A game ball is guided from the outside of the distribution winning means to the at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means by the introduction guide path. The movable piece provided at the guide port of the introduction guide route closes the guide port in the closed state, and guides the game ball to the introduction guide route in the open state. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. Further, since the movable piece is opened in at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, the game ball can be guided from the outside of the distribution winning means, so that the player A game ball can enter directly without going through the ball opening, so you can feel the freshness. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game.

  A entrance for which it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, a determination unit for determining whether the game is correct based on the determination of the determination result, In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that allows a variable winning device that grants a bonus to a player to win a game ball based on the determination result of winning or failure, There is a distribution winning means for guiding a game ball to the entrance, and the allocation winning means is a distribution entrance that allows a game ball to enter in the allocation winning means, and the distribution entrance First flow path switching means having first distribution movable means that is movable alternately between a first position where game balls entering the ball opening are distributed to the first flow path and a second position where the game balls are distributed to the second flow path. And a third game ball distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means A second flow path switching means having a second distribution movable means that is movable alternately between a third position that is distributed to the road and a fourth position that is distributed to the fourth flow path that is guided to the entrance. The variable winning device and the distribution winning means are respectively arranged at positions where the game ball can enter the distribution entrance when the game ball enters the variable winning device. A gaming machine K1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K1, it is determined that the success / failure determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the entrance. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is determined by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is a win, the privilege game execution unit executes a privilege game that allows a variable winning device that provides a privilege to the player to win a game ball. In the distribution winning means for guiding the game balls to the entrance, the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance where the game balls can enter the distribution winning means are distributed to the first flow path. The first distribution moving means of the first flow path switching means is alternately moved to the position and the second position to be distributed to the second flow path, so that the distribution is performed. The third position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed to the third flow path and the fourth position where the game balls are distributed to the fourth flow path guided to the entrance port Allocation is performed by alternately moving the second distribution moving means of the second flow path switching means. The variable winning device and the distribution winning means are respectively arranged at positions where the game balls can be inserted into the distribution entrance when the game balls are inserted into the variable winning device. Thereby, the player can enjoy the expectation as to whether or not the game ball that has entered the distribution winning means will enter the entrance. Therefore, every time a predetermined number of game balls enter the allocation winning means, the game ball enters the entrance, so that the player can change the amount of time after entering the entrance. It is possible to predict whether or not it is necessary to enter the prize winning means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, during the award game, it is possible to enter the distribution entrance, so that during the award game, by entering the allocation winning means, before entering the entrance after the award game. The required number of balls can be reduced, and the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can be motivated to enter a lot of game balls not only in the variable prize apparatus but also in the distribution prize means during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine K1, at least the special award game with a long opening time of the variable winning means and a normal award game with a shorter opening time of the variable winning means than the special award game are set in the award game, and the success / failure determination is performed. A gaming machine K2 having a bonus game type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game based on the result of the determination of success / failure by the means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. In other words, at least a special award game with a long opening time of the variable winning means and a normal award game with a shorter opening time of the variable winning means than the special award game are set in the award game. Based on the winning result, the bonus game type is determined by the bonus game type determining means. Thereby, when the special privilege game is determined, not only the opening time of the variable winning device is lengthened, but also an opportunity for more game balls to enter the distribution winning means can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with more benefits for the type of privilege game.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable winning device has a rotating door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine so that the variable winning device is normally in a state where the rotating door is standing upright. The game ball is restricted from entering inside, and when the bonus game is executed, the revolving door rotates to the front side of the gaming machine and receives the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the revolving door, A gaming machine K3 configured to be guided to the variable winning device and to the distribution entrance.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable prize device is provided with a pivot door pivotally supported on the front side of the gaming machine. In a normal state, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize device by the pivoting door in the standing state. When the privilege game is executed, the turning door is turned to the front side of the gaming machine, so that the game ball received on the upper surface of the turning door is guided to the variable winning device and the distribution entrance. As a result, during the bonus game, more game balls can be entered into the distribution winning means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game after the bonus game, and to allow the player to play the game for a longer time.

  The gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 or D2, E1 to E4, F1 or F2, G1 to G3, H1 or H2, I1 or I2, J1, K1, K1 to K3 The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a dynamic display of a special symbol that notifies a lottery of a game when a game ball enters a start opening provided on a game board surface and notifies the lottery result. Have been proposed to be implemented in.
For example, in Patent Document 1, the probability that a game ball will win a starting opening provided on the game board surface is changed by adjusting the distance between the nails provided on the game board surface (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-305209).
However, in such a gaming machine, the process until the game ball wins the start opening is monotonous, and there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game when playing for a long time.
This technical idea aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the malfunction that a player gets tired of a game in the above gaming machines.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a first flow path switching unit that alternately distributes game balls into a first flow path and a second flow path, and the first flow path switching means. Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path to a third flow path and a fourth flow path, and a fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means A game entrance that can enter a game ball flowing down, a game determination unit that determines whether or not the game is successful based on the game ball entering the game entrance, and a test result determination by the program determination unit. Based on the result being a win, at least one of the privilege game execution means for granting a privilege game to the player, and the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means after the bonus game ends. For one side, determine the flow path to determine which flow path the game ball is assigned to And the step, and has a.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are a first storage portion and a game ball that can receive a game ball. A second housing portion different from the first housing portion that can receive the first housing portion, the first housing portion and the second housing portion are provided, and the second housing portion rotates by receiving a game ball in the second housing portion. The game balls are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, rotated to a first position where the game balls can be received in the first storage portion, and the game balls are moved to the first storage portion at the first position. Rotating means for rotating the game ball into the first flow path or the third flow path and rotating the game ball to a second position where the game ball can be received in the second storage portion; In the first position or the second position, the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. Wherein said rotating means from the first position from the second position to the first position or the second position is one having a, a rotation restricting means for restricting the pivoting Before.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the flow path determining means is based on a predetermined lottery, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means, Is set to the first position or the second position, and the turning means is located at the position determined by the flow path determining means and the first flow path switching means and the second position. Autonomous rotation means for rotating the second flow path switching means is provided.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the gaming machine corresponds to the number of gaming balls distributed to the first flow path switching means before the gaming ball enters the entrance. And a setting table in which settings of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are stored, respectively, and the flow path determination means is arranged at the entrance according to the predetermined lottery. The number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering a game ball is determined, and based on the number of game balls, the first flow path switching means and the The setting with the second flow path switching means is determined respectively.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the first flow path switching means. The game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means are distributed alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path by the second flow path switching means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path distributed by the second flow path switching means can enter, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, the bonus game is given to the player by the bonus game executing means.
I'm, distribution is the game ball by the first flow path switching means is turned to ball entrance to the ball entrance opening to a predetermined number, the player is, what ball eyes of game balls is distributed by the first flow path switching means It can be enjoyed and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.
In addition, after the bonus game is over, the flow path is determined as to which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. Determined by means. As a result, the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means changes randomly until the game balls enter the entrance after the bonus game, and the player is asked what setting is to be made. It can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that more enjoyment can be provided to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are provided with a first storage portion and a second storage portion that can receive a game ball, and when the game ball is received in the second storage portion, The game balls received are distributed to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, and the first storage section can receive the game balls in the first storage section and the first storage section at the first position. Rotating means that rotates by receiving the game ball, distributes the received game ball to the first flow path or the third flow path, and moves to the second position where the game ball can be received in the second housing portion. It is rotated by. Then, in the first position or the second position, the rotating means rotates from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first housing part or the second housing part. This is regulated by the rotation regulating means.
As a result, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are alternately rotated to the first position and the second position, so that it is possible to reliably distribute the game balls alternately. Further, since the rotation from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position is restricted when the game ball does not enter the first housing portion or the second housing portion, it is continuously controlled. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being received in the same accommodating portion. Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls can be alternately allocated more reliably.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be achieved. That is, based on a predetermined lottery, the flow path determining means determines whether the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set to the first position or the second position, respectively. In the rotation means, the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are respectively rotated by the rotation means at the positions determined by the flow path determination means. Thereby, the setting after the privilege game of a 1st flow path switching means and a 2nd flow path switching means can be performed easily. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing at the end of the bonus game, and to shorten the time until the normal game is executed after the bonus game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the setting of the first flow path switching means and the first flow path switching means is made in accordance with the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game ball into the entrance. Are stored in the setting table. Then, based on a predetermined lottery, the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for entering the game balls into the entrance is determined, and from the setting table, the first flow path switching means and The setting with the second channel switching unit is determined by the channel determining unit.
Accordingly, the first flow path switching member and the second flow path switching member can be easily set in accordance with the number of game balls required to enter the game ball into the entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load after executing the privilege game can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a7 seventh distribution rotating member (first flow path switching means)
64a8 eighth distribution rotating member (second flow path switching means)
64b7, 64b8 magnet (rotation restricting means)
71 First start (entrance)
201 MPU (win / fail judgment means)
263 Sorting position adjustment motor (autonomous rotation means)
S103 (privilege game execution means)
S1232 (channel determining means)

Claims (4)

First flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path;
Second flow path switching means for alternately distributing the game balls distributed to the second flow path by the first flow path switching means to the third flow path and the fourth flow path;
A ball entrance that allows a game ball flowing down the fourth flow path distributed to the second flow path switching means to enter;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance, a success / failure determination unit for determining whether or not a game is successful,
On the basis of the fact that the success / failure determination result by the success / failure determination unit is a win, a privilege game executing means for giving a privilege game to the player;
After the bonus game is completed, a flow path determination is made to determine which flow path the game ball is assigned to at least one of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means. And a gaming machine. The first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are:
A first housing that can receive a game ball and a second housing that is different from the first housing that can receive a game ball;
The first storage portion and the second storage portion are provided, and rotate by receiving a game ball in the second storage portion, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path or the fourth flow path, The first storage portion is rotated to a first position where the game ball can be received, and the first storage portion is rotated by receiving the game ball in the first storage portion at the first position. A rotating means for distributing the game balls to the road and rotating the game balls to a second position where the game balls can be received in the second housing portion;
In the first position or the second position, the rotating means moves from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position before the game ball is received in the first storage part or the second storage part. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a rotation restricting unit that restricts the rotation of the game machine. The flow path determining means determines whether to set the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means to the first position or the second position based on a predetermined lottery. Is,
The turning means includes autonomous turning means for turning the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means at positions determined by the flow path determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 2. The first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means are set according to the number of game balls distributed to the first flow path switching means before the game ball enters the entrance. Each has a stored setting table,
The flow path determining means determines the number of game balls to be distributed to the first flow path switching means necessary for causing a game ball to enter the entrance, based on the predetermined lottery, and the game The setting of the first flow path switching means and the second flow path switching means is respectively determined from the setting table based on the number of spheres. The gaming machine described.

Images